Copyright © 1994-2025 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc
$NetBSD: pkgsrc.html,v 1.266 2025/07/24 18:18:48 martin Exp $
Abstract
pkgsrc is a centralized package management system for Unix-like operating systems. This guide provides information for users and developers of pkgsrc. It covers installation of binary and source packages, creation of binary and source packages and a high-level overview about the infrastructure.
Table of Contents
CFLAGS?MakefilesPLIST generationPLIST_SRCmk.confList of Tables
Table of Contents
There is a lot of software freely available for Unix-based systems, which is usually available in form of the source code. Before such software can be used, it needs to be configured to the local system, compiled and installed, and this is exactly what The NetBSD Packages Collection (pkgsrc) does. pkgsrc also has some basic commands to handle binary packages, so that not every user has to build the packages for himself, which is a time-costly task.
pkgsrc currently contains several thousand packages, including:
www/apache24 - The Apache
	  web server
www/firefox - The Firefox
	  web browser
meta-pkgs/gnome - The GNOME
	  Desktop Environment
meta-pkgs/kde4 - The K
	  Desktop Environment
… just to name a few.
pkgsrc has built-in support for handling varying dependencies, such as pthreads and X11, and extended features such as IPv6 support on a range of platforms.
pkgsrc provides the following key features:
Easy building of software from source as well as the creation and installation of binary packages. The source and latest patches are retrieved from a master or mirror download site, checksum verified, then built on your system. Support for binary-only distributions is available for both native platforms and NetBSD emulated platforms.
All packages are installed in a consistent directory tree, including binaries, libraries, man pages and other documentation.
Tracking of package dependencies automatically, including when performing updates, to ensure required packages are installed. The configuration files of various packages are handled automatically during updates, so local changes are preserved.
Like NetBSD, pkgsrc is designed with portability in mind and consists of highly portable code. This allows the greatest speed of development when porting to a new platform. This portability also ensures that pkgsrc is consistent across all platforms.
The installation prefix, acceptable software licenses, international encryption requirements and build-time options for a large number of packages are all set in a simple, central configuration file.
The entire source (not including the distribution files) is freely available under a BSD license, so you may extend and adapt pkgsrc to your needs. Support for local packages and patches is available right out of the box, so you can configure it specifically for your environment.
The following principles are basic to pkgsrc:
“It should only work if it's right.”
— That means, if a package contains bugs, it's better to find
them and to complain about them rather than to just install the package
and hope that it works. There are numerous checks in pkgsrc that try to
find such bugs: static analysis tools (pkgtools/pkglint), build-time checks (portability
of shell scripts), and post-installation checks (installed files,
references to shared libraries, script interpreters).
“If it works, it should work everywhere” — Like NetBSD has been ported to many hardware architectures, pkgsrc has been ported to many operating systems. Care is taken that packages behave the same on all platforms.
pkgsrc consists of both a source distribution and a binary distribution for these operating systems. After retrieving the required source or binaries, you can be up and running with pkgsrc in just minutes!
pkgsrc was derived from FreeBSD's ports system, and initially developed for NetBSD only. Since then, pkgsrc has grown a lot, and now supports the following platforms:
Table 1.1. Platforms supported by pkgsrc
| Platform | Date Support Added | Notes | 
|---|---|---|
| NetBSD | Aug 1997 | |
| Solaris | Mar 1999 | README.Solaris | 
| Linux | Jun 1999 | README.Linux | 
| Darwin / Mac OS X / OS X / macOS | Oct 2001 | README.macOS | 
| FreeBSD | Nov 2002 | README.FreeBSD | 
| OpenBSD | Nov 2002 | README.OpenBSD | 
| IRIX | Dec 2002 | README.IRIX | 
| BSD/OS | Dec 2003 | Removed from pkgsrc Mar 2025 | 
| AIX | Dec 2003 | README.AIX | 
| Interix (Microsoft Windows Services for Unix) | Mar 2004 | Removed from pkgsrc Apr 2025 | 
| DragonFlyBSD | Oct 2004 | |
| OSF/1 | Nov 2004 | README.OSF1 | 
| HP-UX | Apr 2007 | README.HPUX | 
| Haiku | Sep 2010 | README.Haiku | 
| MirBSD | Jan 2011 | Removed from pkgsrc Mar 2025 | 
| Minix3 | Nov 2011 | README.Minix3 | 
| Cygwin | Mar 2013 | README.Cygwin | 
| GNU/kFreeBSD | Jul 2013 | Removed from pkgsrc Mar 2025 | 
| Bitrig | Jun 2014 | Removed from pkgsrc Sep 2022 | 
This document is divided into three parts. The first, The pkgsrc user's guide, describes how one can use one of the packages in the Package Collection, either by installing a precompiled binary package, or by building one's own copy using the NetBSD package system. The second part, The pkgsrc developer's guide, explains how to prepare a package so it can be easily built by other NetBSD users without knowing about the package's building details. The third part, The pkgsrc infrastructure internals is intended for those who want to understand how pkgsrc is implemented.
This document is available in various formats: HTML, PDF, PS, TXT.
There has been a lot of talk about “ports”, “packages”, etc. so far. Here is a description of all the terminology used within this document.
A set of files and building instructions
	    that describe what's necessary
	    to build a certain piece of software using
            pkgsrc. Packages are traditionally stored under
	    /usr/pkgsrc,
	    but may be stored in any location,
	    referred to as PKGSRCDIR.
This is the former name of “pkgsrc”. It is part of the NetBSD operating system and can be bootstrapped to run on non-NetBSD operating systems as well. It handles building (compiling), installing, and removing of packages.
This term describes the file or files that are
	    provided by the author of the piece of software to
	    distribute his work. All the changes necessary to build on
	    NetBSD are reflected in the corresponding package. Usually
	    the distfile is in the form of a compressed tar-archive,
	    but other types are possible, too. Distfiles are usually
	    stored below
	    /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
This is the term used by FreeBSD and OpenBSD people for what we call a package. In NetBSD terminology, “port” refers to a different architecture.
A set of binaries built with pkgsrc from a distfile
	    and stuffed together in a single .tgz
	    file so it can be installed on machines of the same
	    machine architecture without the need to
	    recompile. Packages are usually generated in
	    /usr/pkgsrc/packages; there is also
	    an archive on ftp.NetBSD.org.
Sometimes, this is referred to by the term “package” too, especially in the context of precompiled packages.
The piece of software to be installed which will be constructed from all the files in the distfile by the actions defined in the corresponding package.
The pkgsrc users are people who use the packages provided by pkgsrc. Typically they are system administrators. The people using the software that is inside the packages (maybe called “end users”) are not covered by the pkgsrc guide.
There are two kinds of pkgsrc users: Some only want to install pre-built binary packages. Others build the pkgsrc packages from source, either for installing them directly or for building binary packages themselves. For pkgsrc users Part I, “The pkgsrc user's guide” should provide all necessary documentation.
A package maintainer creates packages as described in Part II, “The pkgsrc developer's guide”.
These people are involved in all those files
	that live in the mk/ directory and below.
	Only these people should need to read through Part III, “The pkgsrc infrastructure internals”, though others might be curious,
	too.
When giving examples for commands, shell prompts are used to
      show if the command should/can be issued as root, or if
      “normal” user privileges are sufficient. We use a
      # for root's shell prompt, a % for users'
      shell prompt, assuming they use the C-shell or tcsh and a $ for
      Bourne shell and derivatives.
Table of Contents
CFLAGS?To get help when using pkgsrc, the definitive source is this document, the pkgsrc guide. If you don't find anything here, there are alternatives:
	The built-in pkgsrc help, which is available after bootstrapping
	pkgsrc. Run bmake help topic=… to get
	help for any topic, such as a variable name like
	BUILD_DEFS, a make target like
	do-build, a missing C or C++ function like
	strcasecmp or any other topic.
The available help topics are listed in Appendix E, Help topics.
	To see the value of a single variable, run bmake
	show-var VARNAME=X.
	To see the values of the most common variables, run
	bmake show-all. These variables are grouped by
	topic. To see the variables for a single topic, run
	bmake
	show-all-topic, for example
	bmake show-all-fetch.
The pkgsrc-users mailing list, to which you can subscribe and then ask your questions.
The #pkgsrc IRC channel, which is accessible via a web browser or by using a specialized chat program such as XChat. Pick any user name and join the channel #pkgsrc.
Table of Contents
Before you download and extract the files, you need to decide
where you want to extract them. When using pkgsrc as root user, pkgsrc
is usually installed in /usr/pkgsrc. You are though
free to install the sources and binary packages wherever you want in
your filesystem, provided that the pathname does not contain white-space
or other characters that are interpreted specially by the shell and some
other programs. A safe bet is to use only letters, digits, underscores
and dashes.
Before you download any pkgsrc files, you should decide
	whether you want the current branch or the
	stable branch. The latter is forked on a
	quarterly basis from the current branch and only gets modified
	for security updates. The names of the stable branches are built
	from the year and the quarter, for example
	2025Q2.
The second step is to decide how you want to download pkgsrc. You can get it as a tar file or via CVS. Both ways are described here.
Note that tar archive contains CVS working copy. Thus you can switch to using CVS at any later time.
The primary download location for all pkgsrc files is https://cdn.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/ or ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/ (it points to the same location). There are a number of subdirectories for different purposes, which are described in detail in Appendix D, Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server.
The tar archive for the current branch is in the directory
	current and is called pkgsrc.tar.gz.
	It is autogenerated weekly.
To save download time we provide bzip2- and
	xz-compressed archives which are published at
	pkgsrc.tar.bz2
	and
	pkgsrc.tar.xz
	respectively.
	
You can fetch the same files using FTP.
The tar file for the stable branch 2025Q2 is in the
	directory pkgsrc-2025Q2 and is also called pkgsrc.tar.gz.
To download the latest pkgsrc stable tarball, run:
$ftp ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/pkgsrc-2025Q2/pkgsrc.tar.gz
If you prefer, you can also fetch it using "wget", "curl", or your web browser.
Then, extract it with:
$tar -xzf pkgsrc.tar.gz -C /usr
This will create the directory pkgsrc/
	in /usr/ and all the package source will be 
	stored under /usr/pkgsrc/.
To download pkgsrc-current, run:
$ftp ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/current/pkgsrc.tar.gz
To fetch a specific pkgsrc stable branch, run:
$cd /usr && cvs -q -z2 -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -r pkgsrc-2025Q2 -P pkgsrc
This will create the directory pkgsrc/ 
	in your /usr/ directory and all the package source 
	will be stored under /usr/pkgsrc/.
To fetch the pkgsrc current branch, run:
$cd /usr && cvs -q -z2 -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -P pkgsrc
Refer to the list of available mirrors to choose a faster CVS mirror, if needed.
If you get error messages from rsh, you need to set CVS_RSH variable. E.g.:
$cd /usr && env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs -q -z2 -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -P pkgsrc
Refer to documentation on your command shell how to set CVS_RSH=ssh permanently.
	For Bourne shells, you can set it in your .profile
	or better globally in /etc/profile:
# set CVS remote shell command CVS_RSH=ssh export CVS_RSH
By default, CVS doesn't do things like most people would expect it to do.
	But there is a way to convince CVS, by creating a file called .cvsrc
	in your home directory and saving the following lines to it.
	This file will save you lots of headache and some bug reports, so we strongly recommend it.
	You can find an explanation of this file in the CVS documentation.
# recommended CVS configuration file from the pkgsrc guide cvs -q checkout -P update -dP diff -upN rdiff -u release -d
The preferred way to keep pkgsrc up-to-date is via CVS (which also works if you have first installed it via a tar file). It saves bandwidth and hard disk activity, compared to downloading the tar file again.
When updating from a tar file, you first need to completely remove the old pkgsrc directory. Otherwise those files that have been removed from pkgsrc in the mean time will not be removed on your local disk, resulting in inconsistencies. When removing the old files, any changes that you have done to the pkgsrc files will be lost after updating. Therefore updating via CVS is strongly recommended.
Note that by default the distfiles and the binary packages
	are saved in the pkgsrc tree, so don't forget to rescue them
	before updating. You can also configure pkgsrc to store distfiles
        and packages in directories outside the pkgsrc tree by setting the
	DISTDIR and PACKAGES
	variables. See Chapter 6, Configuring pkgsrc for the details.
To update pkgsrc from a tar file, download the tar file as explained above. Then, make sure that you have not made any changes to the files in the pkgsrc directory. Remove the pkgsrc directory and extract the new tar file. Done.
To update pkgsrc via CVS, change to the pkgsrc directory and run cvs:
$cd /usr/pkgsrc && cvs update -dP
If you get error messages from rsh, you need to set CVS_RSH variable as described above. E.g.:
$cd /usr/pkgsrc && env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs up -dP
When updating pkgsrc, the CVS program keeps track of the branch you selected. But if you, for whatever reason, want to switch from the stable branch to the current one, you can do it by adding the option “-A” after the “update” keyword. To switch from the current branch back to the stable branch, add the “-rpkgsrc-2025Q2” option.
When you update pkgsrc, the CVS program will only touch those files that are registered in the CVS repository. That means that any packages that you created on your own will stay unmodified. If you change files that are managed by CVS, later updates will try to merge your changes with those that have been done by others. See the CVS manual, chapter “update” for details.
Table of Contents
pkgsrc can be bootstrapped for use in two different modes: privileged and unprivileged one. In unprivileged mode in contrast to privileged one all programs are installed under one particular user and cannot utilise privileged operations (packages don't create special users and all special file permissions like setuid are ignored).
Installing the bootstrap kit from source should be as simple as:
#env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -P pkgsrc#cd pkgsrc/bootstrap#./bootstrap
To bootstrap in unprivileged mode pass “--unprivileged” flag to bootstrap
By default, in privileged mode pkgsrc uses
    /usr/pkg for prefix
    where programs will be installed in,
    and /usr/pkg/pkgdb for the package database
    directory where pkgsrc will do its internal bookkeeping,
    /var is used as varbase,
    where packages install their persistent data.
    In unprivileged mode pkgsrc uses
    ~/pkg for prefix,
    ~/pkg/pkgdb for the package database,
    and ~/pkg/var for varbase.
    
You can change default layout using command-line arguments. Run “./bootstrap --help” to get details.
The bootstrap installs a bmake tool. Use this bmake when building via pkgsrc. For examples in this guide, use bmake instead of “make”.
It is possible to bootstrap multiple instances of pkgsrc using non-intersecting directories. Use bmake corresponding to the installation you're working with to build and install packages.
Table of Contents
Basically, there are two ways of using pkgsrc. The first is to only install the package tools and to use binary packages that someone else has prepared. This is the “pkg” in pkgsrc. The second way is to install the “src” of pkgsrc, too. Then you are able to build your own packages, and you can still use binary packages from someone else.
On the cdn.NetBSD.org site and mirrors, there are collections of binary packages, ready to be installed. These binary packages have been built using the default settings for the directories, that is:
/usr/pkg for LOCALBASE, where most of the files are installed,
/usr/pkg/etc for configuration files,
/var for VARBASE, where those files are installed that may change after installation.
If you cannot use these directories for whatever reasons (maybe because you're not root), you cannot use these binary packages, but have to build the packages yourself, which is explained in Section 4.2, “Bootstrapping pkgsrc”.
To install binary packages, you first need to know from where
    to get them. The first place where you should look is on the main
    pkgsrc CDN in the directory /pub/pkgsrc/packages.
This directory contains binary packages for multiple platforms. First, select your operating system. Then, select your hardware architecture, and in the third step, the OS version and the “version” of pkgsrc.
In this directory, you may find a file called
    bootstrap.tar.gz which contains the package
    management tools. If the file is missing, it is likely that your
    operating system already provides those tools. Download the file and
    extract it in the / directory. It will create
    the directories /usr/pkg (containing the tools
    for managing binary packages and the database of installed packages).
In the directory from the last section, there is a
    subdirectory called All/, which contains all the
    binary packages that are available for the platform, excluding those
    that may not be distributed via HTTP or FTP.
To install packages directly from an FTP or HTTP server, run the following commands in a Bourne-compatible shell (be sure to su to root first):
#PATH="/usr/pkg/sbin:/usr/pkg/bin:$PATH"#PKG_PATH="https://cdn.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/packages"#PKG_PATH="$PKG_PATH/OPSYS/ARCH/VERSIONS/All/"#export PATH PKG_PATH#pkg_add pkgin
Instead of URLs, you can also use local paths, for example if
    you are installing from a set of CDROMs, DVDs or an NFS-mounted
    repository. If you want to install packages from multiple sources,
    you can separate them by a semicolon in
    PKG_PATH.
After these preparations, installing a package is very easy:
#pkgin search nginxnginx-1.19.6 Lightweight HTTP server and mail proxy server nginx-1.18.0nb8 Lightweight HTTP server and mail proxy server#pkgin install zsh nginx-1.19.6 vim
Note that pkgin is a user-friendly frontend to the pkg_* tools.
Any prerequisite packages needed to run the package in question will be installed, too, assuming they are present in the repository.
After you've installed packages, be sure to have
    /usr/pkg/bin and /usr/pkg/sbin in your
    PATH so you can actually start the just
    installed program.
To update binary packages, it is recommended that you use pkgin upgrade. This will compare the remote package repository to your locally installed packages and safely replace any older packages.
Note that pkgsrc is released as quarterly branches.
    If you are updating to a newer quarterly branch of pkgsrc, you may
    need to adjust the repository in
    /usr/pkg/etc/pkgin/repositories.conf.
To deinstall a package, it does not matter whether it was installed from source code or from a binary package. Neither the pkgin or the pkg_delete command need to know.
To delete a package, you can just run pkgin remove
    package-name. The package
    name can be given with or without version number.
The pkg_info shows information about installed packages or binary package files. As with other management tools, it works with packages installed from source or binaries.
The pkgsrc Security Team and Packages Groups maintain a list of known vulnerabilities to packages which are (or have been) included in pkgsrc. The list is available from the NetBSD CDN at https://cdn.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/vulns/pkg-vulnerabilities.
Please note that not every "vulnerability" with a CVE assignment is exploitable in every configuration. Some bugs are marked as active simply because an fix was not marked as such. Operating system specific hardening and mitigation features may also reduce the impact of bugs.
Through pkg_admin fetch-pkg-vulnerabilities, this list can be downloaded automatically, and a security audit of all packages installed on a system can take place.
There are two components to auditing. The first step, pkg_admin fetch-pkg-vulnerabilities, is for downloading the list of vulnerabilities from the NetBSD FTP site. The second step, pkg_admin audit, checks to see if any of your installed packages are vulnerable. If a package is vulnerable, you will see output similar to the following:
Package samba-2.0.9 has a local-root-shell vulnerability, see
    https://www.samba.org/samba/whatsnew/macroexploit.html
You may wish to have the vulnerabilities file downloaded daily so that it remains current. This may be done by adding an appropriate entry to the root users crontab(5) entry. For example the entry
# Download vulnerabilities file
0 3 * * * /usr/pkg/sbin/pkg_admin fetch-pkg-vulnerabilities >/dev/null 2>&1
# Audit the installed packages and email results to root
9 3 * * * /usr/pkg/sbin/pkg_admin audit |mail -s "Installed package audit result" \
	    root >/dev/null 2>&1
      
      will update the vulnerability list every day at 3AM, followed by an audit
      at 3:09AM. The result of the audit are then emailed to root.
      On NetBSD this may be accomplished instead by adding the following
      line to /etc/daily.conf:
      
fetch_pkg_vulnerabilities=YES
      
      to fetch the vulnerability list from the daily security script. The system
      is set to audit the packages by default but can be set explicitly, if
      desired (not required), by adding the following line to
/etc/security.conf:
      
check_pkg_vulnerabilities=YES
      
see daily.conf(5) and security.conf(5) for more details.
      Install pkgtools/lintpkgsrc and run
      lintpkgsrc with the “-i”
      argument to check if any packages are stale, e.g.
    
%lintpkgsrc -i... Version mismatch: 'tcsh' 6.09.00 vs 6.10.00
After obtaining pkgsrc, the pkgsrc
  directory now contains a set of packages, organized into
  categories. You can browse the online index of packages, or run
  make readme from the pkgsrc
  directory to build local README.html files for
  all packages, viewable with any web browser such as www/lynx or www/firefox.
The default prefix for installed packages
  is /usr/pkg. If you wish to change this, you
  should do so by setting LOCALBASE in
  mk.conf. You should not try to use multiple
  different LOCALBASE definitions on the same
  system (inside a chroot is an exception). 
The rest of this chapter assumes that the package is already in pkgsrc. If it is not, see Part II, “The pkgsrc developer's guide” for instructions how to create your own packages.
To build packages from source, you need a working C compiler. On NetBSD, you need to install the “comp” and the “text” distribution sets. If you want to build X11-related packages, the “xbase” and “xcomp” distribution sets are required, too.
The first step for building a package is downloading the distfiles (i.e. the unmodified source). If they have not yet been downloaded, pkgsrc will fetch them automatically.
If you have all files that you need in the
    distfiles directory,
    you don't need to connect. If the distfiles are on CD-ROM, you can
    mount the CD-ROM on /cdrom and add:
    
DISTDIR=/cdrom/pkgsrc/distfiles
    to your mk.conf.
By default a list of distribution sites will be randomly
    intermixed to prevent huge load on servers which holding popular
    packages (for example, SourceForge.net mirrors). Thus, every
    time when you need to fetch yet another distfile all the mirrors
    will be tried in new (random) order. You can turn this feature
    off by setting MASTER_SORT_RANDOM=NO (for
    PKG_DEVELOPERs it's already disabled).
You can overwrite some of the major distribution sites to
    fit to sites that are close to your own.  By setting one or two
    variables you can modify the order in which the master sites are
    accessed.  MASTER_SORT contains a whitespace
    delimited list of domain suffixes.
    MASTER_SORT_REGEX is even more flexible, it
    contains a whitespace delimited list of regular expressions.  It
    has higher priority than MASTER_SORT.  Have a
    look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to find
    some examples.  This may save some of your bandwidth and
    time.
You can change these settings either in your shell's environment, or,
    if you want to keep the settings, by editing the
    mk.conf file,
    and adding the definitions there.
      If a package depends on many other packages (such as
      meta-pkgs/kde4), the build process may
      alternate between periods of
      downloading source, and compiling. To ensure you have all the source
      downloaded initially you can run the command:
      
%make fetch-list | sh
      which will output and run a set of shell commands to fetch the
      necessary files into the distfiles directory.  You can
      also choose to download the files manually.
    
Once the software has downloaded, any patches will be applied, then it will be compiled for you. This may take some time depending on your computer, and how many other packages the software depends on and their compile time.
If using bootstrap or pkgsrc on a non-NetBSD system, use the pkgsrc bmake command instead of “make” in the examples in this guide.
For example, type
%cd misc/figlet%make
at the shell prompt to build the various components of the package.
The next stage is to actually install the newly compiled program onto your system. Do this by entering:
%make install
while you are still in the directory for whatever package you are installing.
Installing the package on your system may require you to be root. However, pkgsrc has a just-in-time-su feature, which allows you to only become root for the actual installation step.
That's it, the software should now be installed and setup for use. You can now enter:
%make clean
to remove the compiled files in the work directory, as you shouldn't need them any more. If other packages were also added to your system (dependencies) to allow your program to compile, you can tidy these up also with the command:
%make clean-depends
Taking the figlet utility as an example, we can install it on our system by building as shown in Appendix C, Build logs.
The program is installed under the default root of the
    packages tree - /usr/pkg. Should this not
    conform to your tastes, set the LOCALBASE
    variable in your environment, and it will use that value as the
    root of your packages tree. So, to use
    /usr/local, set
    LOCALBASE=/usr/local in your environment.
    Please note that you should use a directory which is dedicated to
    packages and not shared with other programs (i.e., do not try and
    use LOCALBASE=/usr).  Also, you should not try
    to add any of your own files or directories (such as
    src/, obj/, or
    pkgsrc/) below the
    LOCALBASE tree.  This is to prevent possible
    conflicts between programs and other files installed by the
    package system and whatever else may have been installed
    there.
Some packages look in mk.conf to
    alter some configuration options at build time.  Have a look at
    pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to get an overview
    of what will be set there by default.  Environment variables such
    as LOCALBASE can be set in
    mk.conf to save having to remember to
    set them each time you want to use pkgsrc.
Occasionally, people want to “look under the covers” to see what is going on when a package is building or being installed. This may be for debugging purposes, or out of simple curiosity. A number of utility values have been added to help with this.
If you invoke the make(1) command with
	PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2, then a huge amount of
	information will be displayed. For example,
make patch PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2will show all the commands that are invoked, up to and including the “patch” stage.
If you want to know the value of a certain make(1)
	definition, then the VARNAME definition
	should be used, in conjunction with the show-var
	target. e.g. to show the expansion of the make(1)
	variable LOCALBASE:
%make show-var VARNAME=LOCALBASE/usr/pkg%
If you want to install a binary package that you've either
    created yourself (see next section), that you put into
    pkgsrc/packages manually or that is located on a remote FTP
    server, you can use the "bin-install" target. This target will
    install a binary package - if available - via pkg_add(1),
    else do a make package.  The list of remote FTP
    sites searched is kept in the variable
    BINPKG_SITES, which defaults to
    ftp.NetBSD.org. Any flags that should be added to pkg_add(1)
    can be put into BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS.  See
    pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf for more
    details.
A final word of warning: If you set up a system that has a
    non-standard setting for LOCALBASE, be sure to
    set that before any packages are installed, as you cannot use
    several directories for the same purpose. Doing so will result in
    pkgsrc not being able to properly detect your installed packages,
    and fail miserably. Note also that precompiled binary packages are
    usually built with the default LOCALBASE of
    /usr/pkg, and that you should
    not install any if you use a non-standard
    LOCALBASE.
Table of Contents
The whole pkgsrc system is configured in a single file, usually
called mk.conf. In which directory pkgsrc looks for
that file depends on the installation. On NetBSD, when you use
make(1) from the base system, it is in the directory
/etc/. In all other cases the default location is
${PREFIX}/etc/, depending on where you told the
bootstrap program to install the binary packages.
The format of the configuration file is that of the usual
BSD-style Makefiles. The whole pkgsrc configuration
is done by setting variables in this file. Note that you can define all
kinds of variables, and no special error checking (for example for
spelling mistakes) takes place.
The following variables apply to all
    pkgsrc packages. A complete list of the variables that can be
    configured by the user is available in
    mk/defaults/mk.conf, together with some
    comments that describe each variable's intent.
LOCALBASE: Where
	    packages will be installed. The default is
	    /usr/pkg. Do not mix binary packages
	    with different LOCALBASEs!
CROSSBASE: Where
	    “cross” category packages will be
	    installed. The default is
	    ${LOCALBASE}/cross.
X11BASE: Where
	    X11 is installed on the system. The default is
	    /usr/X11R7.
DISTDIR: Where to store the
	    downloaded copies of the original source distributions used
	    for building pkgsrc packages. The default is
	    ${PKGSRCDIR}/distfiles.
PKG_DBDIR: Where the
	    database about installed packages is stored.  The default is
	    /usr/pkg/pkgdb.
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE:
	    If set, override the packages'
	    MASTER_SITES with this value.
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP:
	    Backup location(s) for distribution files and patch files
	    if not found locally or in
	    ${MASTER_SITES} or
	    ${PATCH_SITES} respectively.
	    The defaults is
	    ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}/.
BINPKG_SITES:
	    List of sites carrying binary pkgs. rel and
	    arch are replaced with OS
	    release (“2.0”, etc.) and architecture
	    (“mipsel”, etc.).
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES:
	    List of acceptable licenses. License names are case-sensitive.
	    Whenever you try to build a package whose license is not in this
	    list, you will get an error message. If the license condition is
	    simple enough, the error message will include specific
	    instructions on how to change this variable.
PACKAGES: The top level
	    directory for the binary packages. The default is
	    ${PKGSRCDIR}/packages.
WRKOBJDIR:
	    The top level directory where, if defined, the separate
	    working directories will get created, and symbolically
	    linked to from ${WRKDIR} (see below).
	    This is useful for building packages on several
	    architectures, then ${PKGSRCDIR}
	    can be NFS-mounted while ${WRKOBJDIR}
	    is local to every architecture. (It should be noted that
	    PKGSRCDIR should not be set by the user
	    — it is an internal definition which refers to the
	    root of the pkgsrc tree. It is possible to have many
	    pkgsrc tree instances.)
LOCALPATCHES:
	    Directory for local patches that aren't part of pkgsrc.
	    See Section 12.3, “patches/*” for more
	    information.
PKGMAKECONF: Location of
	    the mk.conf file used by a package's
	    BSD-style Makefile. If this is not set,
	    MAKECONF is set to
	    /dev/null to avoid picking up
	    settings used by builds in /usr/src.
Whenever a package depends on a package that has a
    builtin.mk file, the dependent package can
    either use the built-in (native) version from the base system or the
    pkgsrc-provided version.  This only affects dependencies, so it is
    still possible to build the pkgsrc package devel/pcre++ even when other packages depend
    on the native pcre++ version instead.
To force using the pkgsrc-provided version for a particular
    package, define “PREFER_PKGSRC =
    package-ID” in mk.conf. To force
    using the native package, define
    “PREFER_NATIVE =
    package-ID”. In both cases, the
    package-ID is the one from the
    buildlink3.mk of the package. In most cases,
    this ID is the same as the directory name of the package, but for
    example, devel/pcre++ has the
    package ID “pcrexx”.
For the packages that are not listed by their package ID,
    pkgsrc uses the pkgsrc-provided version if
    PREFER_PKGSRC contains the word
    “yes”. Otherwise, if PREFER_NATIVE
    contains the word “yes”, pkgsrc uses the native
    version. For example, to require using the pkgsrc-provided versions
    for all but the most basic bits on a NetBSD system, you can
    set:
PREFER_PKGSRC= yes PREFER_NATIVE= getopt skey tcp_wrappers
A package must have a
    builtin.mk file to be listed in
    PREFER_NATIVE, otherwise it is simply ignored in
    that list.
PREFER_PKGSRC and
    PREFER_NATIVE should be set during bootstrap to
    ensure that the bootstrap process does not use inapropriate native
    tools as dependencies for core packages.
#./bootstrap --prefer-pkgsrc yes --prefer-native openssl
Switching between settings globally at a later date can introduce complications with dependency resolution. This is caused by packages built with the opposite preference being installed alongside each other. Hence, when changing any of these variables after bootstrap, you need to rebuild all packages depending on those whose preference has been changed. This is not trivial and should be avoided.
When using pkgsrc on Linux systems, there is high risk of “leakage”, where programs installed by pkgsrc may inadvertently use a command or library not installed by pkgsrc, e.g. those installed by yum or apt. Such foreign dependencies may be installed, removed, or upgraded to a version incompatible with the pkgsrc package at any time, causing pkgsrc packages to subsequently malfunction. Pkgsrc cannot prevent this, as it has no control over other package managers. Another potential problem is that under Redhat Enterprise and related Linux systems, yum packages are only patched and never upgraded, so eventually they may become too outdated for use by pkgsrc. Even intentionally using foreign dependencies, not considered leakage, can lead to these problems, so it is generally discouraged. In order to minimize such problems, PREFER_PKGSRC defaults to “yes” on Linux systems. This ensures that pkgsrc is aware of any changes to dependency packages and can rebuild or upgrade the entire dependency tree as needed. This default can be overridden by setting --prefer-pkgsrc to a list of packages and --prefer-native to “yes”.
PKGSRC_KEEP_BIN_PKGS:
                By default, binary packages of built packages are
                preserved in ${PACKAGES}/All. Setting
		this variable to "no" prevents this.
Packages have to support installation into a
    subdirectory of WRKDIR. This allows a package
    to be built, before the actual filesystem is touched. DESTDIR
    support exists in two variations:
Basic DESTDIR support means that the package installation and packaging is still run as root.
Full DESTDIR support can run the complete build, installation and packaging as normal user. Root privileges are only needed to add packages.
With basic DESTDIR support, make
    clean needs to be run as root.
Considering the foo/bar package,
    DESTDIR full support can be tested using the following commands
$id uid=1000(myusername) gid=100(users) groups=100(users),0(wheel)$mkdir $HOME/packages$cd $PKGSRCDIR/foo/bar
    Verify DESTDIR full support, no root privileges
    should be needed
$ make stage-install
Create a package without root privileges
$ make PACKAGES=$HOME/packages package
For the following command, you must be able to gain root privileges using su(1)
$ make PACKAGES=$HOME/packages install
Then, as a simple user
$ make clean
By default, pkgsrc will use GCC to build packages. This may be overridden by setting the following variables in /etc/mk.conf:
PKGSRC_COMPILER:This is a list of values specifying the chain of compilers to invoke when building packages. Valid values are:
ccc:
	    Compaq C Compilers (Tru64)
ccache:
	    compiler cache (chainable)
clang:
	    Clang C and Objective-C compiler
distcc:
	    distributed C/C++ (chainable)
f2c:
	    Fortran 77 to C compiler (chainable)
icc:
	    Intel C++ Compiler (Linux)
ido:
	    SGI IRIS Development Option cc (IRIX 5)
gcc:
	    GNU C/C++ Compiler
hp:
	    HP-UX C/aC++ compilers
mipspro:
	    Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (n32/n64)
mipspro-ucode:
	    Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (o32)
sunpro:
	    Sun Microsystems, Inc. WorkShip/Forte/Sun ONE Studio
xlc:
	    IBM's XL C/C++ compiler suite
The default is
	  “gcc”.  You can use
	  ccache and/or
	  distcc with an appropriate
	  PKGSRC_COMPILER setting,
	  e.g. “ccache gcc”.  This
	  variable should always be terminated with a value for
	  a real compiler.  Note that only one real compiler
	  should be listed (e.g. “sunpro gcc”
	  is not allowed).
GCC_REQD:This specifies the minimum version of GCC to use when building packages. If the system GCC doesn't satisfy this requirement, then pkgsrc will build and install one of the GCC packages to use instead.
PYTHON_VERSION_DEFAULT:Specifies which version of python to use when several options are available.
PKGSRC_FORTRAN:Specifies the Fortran compiler to use.
	  The default is gfortran.
GFORTRAN_VERSION:If PKGSRC_FORTRAN=
	  gfortran is used, this option specifies which
	  version to use.
If you wish to set the CFLAGS variable,
	please make sure to use the += operator
	instead of the = operator:
CFLAGS+= -your -flags
Using CFLAGS= (i.e. without the
	“+”) may lead to problems with packages that
	need to add their own flags.  You may want to take a look
	at the devel/cpuflags
	package if you're interested in optimization specifically
	for the current CPU. 
If you want to pass flags to the linker, both in the configure
step and the build step, you can do this in two ways.  Either set
LDFLAGS or LIBS.  The difference
between the two is that LIBS will be appended to
the command line, while LDFLAGS come earlier.
LDFLAGS is pre-loaded with rpath settings for ELF
machines depending on the setting of USE_IMAKE or
the inclusion of mk/x11.buildlink3.mk.  As with
CFLAGS, if you do not wish to override these
settings, use the += operator:
LDFLAGS+= -your -linkerflags
PKG_DEVELOPER:
        Run some sanity checks that package developers want:
        
make sure patches apply with zero fuzz
run check-shlibs to see that all binaries will find their shared libs.
CHECK_FILES_STRICT: 
        Also check VARBASE and PKG_SYSCONFDIR
         values in PLIST entries.
        
PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL: The level
        of debugging output which is displayed whilst making and
        installing the package.  The default value for this is 0,
        which will not display the commands as they are executed
        (normal, default, quiet operation); the value 1 will display
        all shell commands before their invocation, and the value 2
        will display both the shell commands before their invocation,
        as well as their actual execution progress with set
        -x.
Some packages have build time options, usually to select between different dependencies, enable optional support for big dependencies or enable experimental features.
To see which options, if any, a package supports, and which options are mutually exclusive, run make show-options, for example:
    The following options are supported by this package:
        ssl      Enable SSL support.
    Exactly one of the following gecko options is required:
        firefox  Use firefox as gecko rendering engine.
        mozilla  Use mozilla as gecko rendering engine.
    At most one of the following database options may be selected:
        mysql    Enable support for MySQL database.
        pgsql    Enable support for PostgreSQL database.
    These options are enabled by default: firefox
    These options are currently enabled: mozilla ssl
The following variables can be defined in
    mk.conf to select which options to
    enable for a package: PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS,
    which can be used to select or disable options for all packages
    that support them, and
    PKG_OPTIONS.,
    which can be used to select or disable options specifically for
    package pkgbasepkgbase.  Options listed in
    these variables are selected, options preceded by “-”
    are disabled. A few examples:
$grep "PKG.*OPTION"mk.confPKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS= -arts -dvdread -esound PKG_OPTIONS.kdebase= debug -sasl PKG_OPTIONS.apache= suexec
It is important to note that options that were specifically suggested by the package maintainer must be explicitly removed if you do not wish to include the option. If you are unsure you can view the current state with make show-options.
The following settings are consulted in the order given, and the last setting that selects or disables an option is used:
the default options as suggested by the package maintainer
the options implied by the settings of legacy variables (see below)
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS
PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase
For groups of mutually exclusive options, the last option selected is used, all others are automatically disabled. If an option of the group is explicitly disabled, the previously selected option, if any, is used. It is an error if no option from a required group of options is selected, and building the package will fail.
Before the options framework was introduced, build options
    were selected by setting a variable (often named
    USE_) in
    FOOmk.conf for each option.  To ease
    transition to the options framework for the user, these legacy
    variables are converted to the appropriate options setting
    (PKG_OPTIONS.)
    automatically.  A warning is issued to prompt the user to update
    pkgbasemk.conf to use the options framework
    directly.  Support for the legacy variables will be removed
    eventually.
Table of Contents
Once you have built and installed a package, you can create a binary package which can be installed on another system with pkg_add(1). This saves having to build the same package on a group of hosts and wasting CPU time. It also provides a simple means for others to install your package, should you distribute it.
To create a binary package, change into the appropriate directory in pkgsrc, and run make package:
$cd misc/figlet$make package
This will build your package (if not already done) and package
    it into a binary package. You can then use the
    pkg_* tools to manipulate it. Binary packages are
    created in PACKAGES, which defaults to
    /usr/pkgsrc/packages, in the form of a compressed
    tar file. See Section C.2, “Packaging figlet” for a continuation of
    the above misc/figlet
    example.
See Chapter 23, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such a binary package.
Table of Contents
For a number of reasons, you may want to build binary packages for a large selected set of packages in pkgsrc, or even for all pkgsrc packages. For instance, when you have multiple machines that should run the same software, it is wasted time if they all build their packages themselves from source. Or you may want to build a list of packages you want and check them before deploying onto production systems. There is a way of getting a set of binary packages: the bulk build system, or pbulk ("p" stands for "parallel"). This chapter describes how to set it up.
First of all, you have to decide whether you build all packages or a limited set of them. Full bulk builds usually consume a lot more resources, both space and time, than builds for some practical sets of packages. A number of particularly heavy packages exist that are not actually interesting to a wide audience. (The approximate resource consumption for a full bulk build is given in section Section 8.3, “Requirements of a full bulk build”.) For limited bulk builds you need to make a list of packages you want to build. Note that all their dependencies will be built, so you don't need to track them manually.
During bulk builds various packages are installed and deinstalled
in /usr/pkg (or whatever LOCALBASE is),
so make sure that you don't need any package during the builds.
Essentially, you should provide a fresh system, either a chroot environment
or something even more restrictive, depending on what the operating system provides,
or dedicate the whole physical machine.
As a useful side effect this makes sure that bulk builds cannot
break anything in your system. There have been numerous cases where
certain packages tried to install files outside the
LOCALBASE or wanted to edit some files in
/etc.
Running a bulk build works roughly as follows:
First, build the pbulk infrastructure in a fresh pkgsrc location.
Then, build each of the packages from a clean installation directory using the infrastructure.
To simplify configuration, we provide the helper script mk/pbulk/pbulk.sh.
In order to use it, prepare a clear system (real one, chroot environment, jail, zone, virtual machine). Configure network access to fetch distribution files. Create a user with name "pbulk".
Fetch and extract pkgsrc. Use a command like one of these:
#(cd /usr && ftp -o - https://cdn.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/current/pkgsrc.tar.gz | tar -zxf-)#(cd /usr && fetch -o - https://cdn.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/current/pkgsrc.tar.gz | tar -zxf-)#(cd /usr && cvs -Q -z3 -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot get -P pkgsrc)
Or any other way that fits (e.g., curl, wget).
Deploy and configure pbulk tools, e.g.:
#sh pbulk.sh -n # use native make, no bootstrap kit needed (for use on NetBSD)#sh pbulk.sh -n -c mk.conf.frag # native, apply settings from given mk.conf fragment#sh pbulk.sh -nlc mk.conf.frag # native, apply settings, configure for limited build
mk.conf.frag is a fragment of
mk.conf that contains settings you want to
apply to packages you build. For instance,
PKG_DEVELOPER=          yes     # perform more checks
X11_TYPE=               modular # use pkgsrc X11
SKIP_LICENSE_CHECK=     yes     # accept all licences (useful
                                # when building all packages)
If configured for limited list, replace the list in /usr/pbulk/etc/pbulk.list
with your list of packages, one per line without empty lines or comments. E.g.:
www/firefox mail/thunderbird misc/libreoffice4
At this point you can also review configuration in /usr/pbulk/etc
and make final amendments, if wanted.
Start it:
#/usr/pbulk/bin/bulkbuild
After it finishes, you'll have /mnt filled with distribution files, binary packages, and reports,
plain text summary in /mnt/bulklog/meta/report.txt
The pbulk.sh script does not cover all possible use cases.
While being ready to run, it serves as a good starting point to understand and build more complex setups.
The script is kept small enough for better understanding.
The pbulk.sh script supports running
unprivileged bulk build and helps configuring distributed bulk builds.
Distributed bulk builds support either building in worker chroots
(each node is a path to a different chroot)
that replicate the target system, including the pbulk prefix,
or remote machines (each node is
an IP address that must be accessible over SSH without a password).
A complete bulk build requires lots of disk space. Some of the disk space can be read-only, some other must be writable. Some can be on remote filesystems (such as NFS) and some should be local. Some can be temporary filesystems, others must survive a sudden reboot.
70 GB for the distfiles (read-write, remote, temporary)
60 GB for the binary packages (read-write, remote, permanent)
1 GB for the pkgsrc tree (read-only, remote, permanent)
5 GB for LOCALBASE (read-write, local, temporary)
10 GB for the log files (read-write, remote, permanent)
5 GB for temporary files (read-write, local, temporary)
To ensure that pkgsrc packages work in different configurations, it makes sense to run non-default bulk builds from time to time. This section lists some ideas for bulk builds that intentionally let packages fail if they don't follow the pkgsrc style.
Add the following line to mk.conf.
GNU_CONFIGURE_STRICT= yes
When a package fails this additional check, the most common cause is that the configure option was valid for an older version of the package but does not apply anymore. In that case, just remove it.
The job of a compiler is not restricted to producing executable code, most compilers also detect typical programming mistakes. The pkgsrc compiler wrappers make it easy to force compiler options when the package is built. This can be used to find typical bugs across all packages that are in pkgsrc. By reporting these bugs upstream, the packages will be more reliable with the next updates.
Add some of the following lines to mk.conf:
CFLAGS+= -Werror=char-subscripts CFLAGS+= -Werror=implicit-function-declaration
When a package fails to build using these stricter compiler options, document the circumstances in which the compiler produced the error message. This includes:
The platform
(MACHINE_PLATFORM)
The source file
An excerpt of the code. GCC and Clang already do this as part of the diagnostic.
The exact error message from the compiler.
If a package produces these error messages, but the package is
fine, record this in your local mk.conf, like this, to skip this check
in the next builds:
.if ${PKGPATH} == category/package
# Version ${VERSION} failed on ${MACHINE_PLATFORM}:
# error message
# code
# Reason why the code does not need to be fixed.
BUILDLINK_TRANSFORM+=   rm:-Werror=char-subscripts
.endif
If the error messages from the compiler are valid and the code
needs to be fixed, prepare a local patch (see
LOCALPATCHES) and report the bug to the upstream
authors of the package, providing them with the information you collected
above.
Patches that are not essential for the package to work should only be reported upstream but not committed to pkgsrc, to make future updates easier.
When adding custom compiler flags via CFLAGS,
these apply to all phases of the package build process. Especially in the
configure phase, adding -Werror leads to wrong
decisions. The GNU configure scripts feed many small test programs to the
C compiler to see whether certain headers are available, functions are
defined in a library and programs can be run. In many cases these
programs would not survive a strict compiler run with -Wall
-Wextra -Werror.
The pkgsrc infrastructure is flexible enough to support compiler
options being added between the configure and
build phases. It's a little more complicated than the
other examples in this section but still easy enough.
The basic idea is to use the pkgsrc compiler wrapper to inject the
desired compiler options. The compiler wrapper's original task is to hide
unwanted directories of include files and to normalize compiler options.
It does this by wrapping the compiler command and rewriting the command
line. To see this in action, run bmake patch in a
package directory and examine the
work/.cwrappers/config directory. It contains
individual configurations for the C compiler and the related tools. The
plan is to find a hook between the configure and build phases, and to
modify these configuration files at that point.
To find this hook, have a look at
mk/build/build.mk, which contains among others the
pre-build-checks-hook. The word
checks doesn't quite fit, but the
pre-build-hook sounds good enough.
The code to be included in mk.conf is:
# Just a few example options.
BUILD_ONLY_CFLAGS=      -Wall -Werror -O2 -DTEMPDIR='"/tmp"'
.if ${BUILD_ONLY_CFLAGS:U:M*}
pre-build-checks-hook: add-build-only-cflags
add-build-only-cflags: .PHONY
        ${RUN} cd ${CWRAPPERS_CONFIG_DIR};      \
        ${TEST} ! -f ${.TARGET} || exit 0;      \
        for flag in ${BUILD_ONLY_CFLAGS}; do    \
                ${ECHO} "append=$$flag" >> cc;  \
        done;                                   \
        > ${.TARGET}
.endif
(When editing the mk.conf, make sure that the commands of the
add-build-only-cflags target are indented with a tab,
not with spaces.)
The condition in the .if statement contains the
:U modifier to prevent parse errors if the variable
should be undefined, possibly because it is only defined for a subset of
the packages. The :M* modifier ensures that there is
at least one compiler option, to prevent a syntax error in the shell
parser.
The code around the ${.TARGET} variable ensures
that the additional compiler options are only appended once, even if
bmake build is run multiple times. To do this, it
creates a marker file.
To verify that this setup works, run bmake
configure in a package directory. Up to now, everything works
as usual. Examine the directory
work/.cwrappers/config to see that the compiler
options from BUILD_ONLY_CFLAGS are not yet added to
the file cc. Examine the tail of the
work/.work.log file to see that the normal compiler
options are used.
Now run bmake build. This will append the
options to the file cc and will create the marker
file in the same directory. After that, the build starts as usual, but
with the added compiler options. Examine the tail of the file
work/.work.log to see that the lines starting with
[*] don't contain the compiler options, but the
corresponding lines starting with <.> do end
with these options.
Building packages using this setup variant and fixing the resulting bugs is the same as in Section 8.4.2, “Detect classes of bugs by forcing compiler warnings”.
Some directories like PREFIX,
VARBASE, PKG_SYSCONFDIR,
PKGMANDIR, PKG_INFODIR can be
configured in pkgsrc. Set these to arbitrary paths during bootstrap or
afterwards in mk.conf.
PREFIX= /a-random-uuid PKG_SYSCONFDIR= /a-random-uuid VARBASE= /a-random-uuid PKGMANDIR= a-random-uuid PKG_INFODIR= a-random-uuid
When building a package, warnings are typically ignored since they
just flow by and do not cause the build to fail immediately. To find
these warnings, redefine them to errors in mk.conf.
DELAYED_WARNING_MSG=    ${DELAYED_ERROR_MSG} "(was warning)"
WARNING_MSG=            ${FAIL_MSG} "(was warning)"
(There are many more classes of warnings in pkgsrc, and most of them can be redefined with a simple definition like above.
If a package suggests to add USE_TOOLS+=perl to
the package Makefile, research whether the package actually needs Perl.
If it does, add USE_TOOLS+=perl to the package
Makefile, and if it doesn't, add
TOOLS_BROKEN+=perl.
Using pkglint as part of the regular build process is mostly a waste of time. If you want to fix some of the warnings, just run pkglint recursively on the whole pkgsrc tree. This will take a few minutes (up to 10), which is much faster than a complete bulk build.
To ensure that the binary packages don't contain references to the
build directory, there is already CHECK_WRKREF. If
that variable includes the item extra, it is
possible to define additional patterns that must not appear in any
installed file. This is specified in mk.conf.
CHECK_WRKREF= extra CHECK_WRKREF_EXTRA_DIRS+= /usr/local CHECK_WRKREF_EXTRA_DIRS+= /usr/pkg CHECK_WRKREF_EXTRA_DIRS+= @[A-Z][A-Z]*@
The above patterns will probably generate many false positives, therefore the results need to be taken with a grain of salt.
To run the test suites that come with each package, add this line
to mk.conf.
PKGSRC_RUN_TEST= yes
Be prepared that even the most basic packages fail this test. When doing a bulk build with this, it will often abort in the early phase where the packages are scanned for their dependencies since there are cyclic dependencies. There is still a lot to do in this area.
To catch typos in the shell snippets from the Makefile fragments,
add the -u flag to most of the commands by adding this
line to mk.conf.
RUN= @set -eu;
After that, ensure that none of the bulk build log files (even
those for successfully built packages) contains the string
parameter not set or whatever error message the
command sh -ceu '$undefined' outputs.
See mk/misc/common.mk for the existing
definition.
The build logs of a package are often quite long. This allows error
messages or other interesting details to hide between the noise. To make
the actual error message stand out more, add these lines to
mk.conf.
GNU_CONFIGURE_QUIET= yes MAKE_FLAGS+= -s
The -s option works for both GNU Make and BSD
Make. On exotic platforms with their own make, it may be a little
different.
After your pkgsrc bulk-build has completed, you may wish to
    create a CD-ROM set of the resulting binary packages to assist
    in installing packages on other machines.  The
    pkgtools/cdpack package provides
    a simple tool for creating the ISO 9660 images.
    cdpack arranges the packages on the CD-ROMs in a
    way that keeps all the dependencies for a given package on the same
    CD as that package.
Complete documentation for cdpack is found in the cdpack(1)
      man page. The following short example assumes that the binary
      packages are left in
      /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All and that
      sufficient disk space exists in /u2 to
      hold the ISO 9660 images.
#mkdir /u2/images#pkg_add /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All/cdpack#cdpack /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
If you wish to include a common set of files
      (COPYRIGHT, README,
      etc.) on each CD in the collection, then you need to create a
      directory which contains these files, e.g.:
#mkdir /tmp/common#echo "This is a README" > /tmp/common/README#echo "Another file" > /tmp/common/COPYING#mkdir /tmp/common/bin#echo "#!/bin/sh" > /tmp/common/bin/myscript#echo "echo Hello world" >> /tmp/common/bin/myscript#chmod 755 /tmp/common/bin/myscript
Now create the images:
#cdpack -x /tmp/common /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
Each image will contain README,
      COPYING, and bin/myscript
      in their root directories.
Table of Contents
The files that are installed by pkgsrc are organized in a way that
is similar to what you find in the /usr directory
of the base system. But some details are different. This is because
pkgsrc initially came from FreeBSD and had adopted its file system
hierarchy. Later it was largely influenced by NetBSD. But no matter
which operating system you are using pkgsrc with, you can expect the
same layout for pkgsrc.
There are mainly four root directories for pkgsrc, which are all
configurable in the bootstrap/bootstrap script.
When pkgsrc has been installed as root, the default locations
are:
LOCALBASE= /usr/pkg PKG_SYSCONFBASE= /usr/pkg/etc VARBASE= /var PKG_DBDIR= /usr/pkg/pkgdb
In unprivileged mode (when pkgsrc has been installed as any other user), the default locations are:
LOCALBASE=              ${HOME}/pkg
PKG_SYSCONFBASE=        ${HOME}/pkg/etc
VARBASE=                ${HOME}/pkg/var
PKG_DBDIR=              ${HOME}/pkg/pkgdb
What these four directories are for, and what they look like is explained below.
LOCALBASE corresponds to the
/usr directory in the base system. It is the
“main” directory where the files are installed and contains
the well-known subdirectories like bin,
include, lib,
share and
sbin.
VARBASE corresponds to
/var in the base system. Some programs (especially
games, network daemons) need write access to it during normal
operation.
PKG_SYSCONFDIR corresponds to
/etc in the base system. It contains configuration
files of the packages, as well as pkgsrc's mk.conf
itself.
The following directories exist in a typical pkgsrc installation
in ${LOCALBASE}.
binContains executable programs that are intended to be directly used by the end user.
emulContains files for the emulation layers of various other operating systems, especially for NetBSD.
etc (the usual location of
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR})Contains the configuration files.
includeContains headers for the C and C++ programming languages.
infoContains GNU info files of various packages.
libContains shared and static libraries.
libdataContains data files that don't change after
installation. Other data files belong into
${VARBASE}.
libexecContains programs that are not intended to be used by end users, such as helper programs or network daemons.
libexec/cgi-binContains programs that are intended to be executed as CGI scripts by a web server.
man (the usual value of
${PKGMANDIR})Contains brief documentation in form of manual pages.
sbinContains programs that are intended to be used only by the super-user.
shareContains platform-independent data files that don't change after installation.
share/docContains documentation files provided by the packages.
share/examplesContains example files provided by the packages. Among
others, the original configuration files are saved here and copied to
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} during
installation.
share/examples/rc.dContains the original files for rc.d scripts.
var (the usual location of
${VARBASE})Contains files that may be modified after installation.
Table of Contents
CFLAGS?This section contains hints, tips & tricks on special things in pkgsrc that we didn't find a better place for in the previous chapters, and it contains items for both pkgsrc users and developers.
The following mailing lists may be of interest to pkgsrc users:
pkgsrc-users: This is a general purpose list for most issues regarding pkgsrc, regardless of platform, e.g. soliciting user help for pkgsrc configuration, unexpected build failures, using particular packages, upgrading pkgsrc installations, questions regarding the pkgsrc release branches, etc. General announcements or proposals for changes that impact the pkgsrc user community, e.g. major infrastructure changes, new features, package removals, etc., may also be posted.
pkgsrc-bulk: A list where the results of pkgsrc bulk builds are sent and discussed.
pkgsrc-changes: This list is for those who are interested in getting a commit message for every change committed to pkgsrc. It is also available in digest form, meaning one daily message containing all commit messages for changes to the package source tree in that 24 hour period.
To subscribe, do:
%echo subscribelistname| mail majordomo@NetBSD.org
Archives for all these mailing lists are available from https://mail-index.NetBSD.org/.
The directory pkgsrc/pkgtools contains
a number of useful utilities for both users and developers of pkgsrc.  This
section attempts only to make the reader aware of some of the utilities and when
they might be useful, and not to duplicate the documentation that comes
with each package.
Utilities used by pkgsrc (automatically installed when needed):
pkgtools/x11-links:
      Symlinks for use by buildlink.
OS tool augmentation (automatically installed when needed):
pkgtools/digest:
      Calculates various kinds of checksums (including SHA3).
pkgtools/libnbcompat:
      Compatibility library for pkgsrc tools.
pkgtools/mtree: Installed on
      non-BSD systems due to lack of native mtree.
pkgtools/pkg_install:
      Up-to-date replacement for
      /usr/sbin/pkg_install, or for use on operating
      systems where pkg_install is not present.
Utilities used by pkgsrc (not automatically installed):
pkgtools/pkg_tarup:
      Create a binary package from an
      already-installed package.  Used by make replace to
      save the old package.
pkgtools/dfdisk:
      Adds extra functionality to pkgsrc, allowing it to fetch distfiles
      from multiple locations. It currently supports the following
      methods: multiple CD-ROMs and network FTP/HTTP connections.
devel/cpuflags: Determine
      the best compiler flags to optimise code for your current
      CPU and compiler. 
Utilities for keeping track of installed packages, being up to date, etc:
pkgtools/pkgin: A package
    update tool similar to apt(1). Download, install, and upgrade
    binary packages easily.
pkgtools/pkg_chk: Reports on
      packages whose installed versions do not match the latest pkgsrc
      entries.
pkgtools/pkgdep: Makes
      dependency graphs of packages, to aid in choosing a strategy for
      updating.
pkgtools/pkgdepgraph: Makes
      graphs from the output of pkgtools/pkgdep (uses graphviz).
pkgtools/pkglint: The
      pkglint(1) program checks a pkgsrc entry for errors.
pkgtools/lintpkgsrc: The lintpkgsrc(1) program
      does various checks on the complete pkgsrc system.
pkgtools/pkgsurvey: Report what
      packages you have installed.
Utilities for people maintaining or creating individual packages:
pkgtools/pkgdiff: Automate
      making and maintaining patches for a package (includes pkgdiff,
      pkgvi, mkpatches, etc.).
pkgtools/url2pkg: Aids in
      converting to pkgsrc.
Utilities for people maintaining pkgsrc (or: more obscure pkg utilities)
pkgtools/pkg_comp: Build
      packages in a chrooted area.
pkgtools/libkver: Spoof
      kernel version for chrooted cross builds.
To install packages from source as a non-root user, download pkgsrc as described in Chapter 3, Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date, cd into that directory and run the command ./bootstrap/bootstrap --unprivileged.
This will install the binary part of pkgsrc to
~/pkg and put the pkgsrc configuration mk.conf
into ~/pkg/etc.
For more details, see mk/unprivileged.mk.
By default, resuming transfers in pkgsrc is disabled, but you can
enable this feature by adding the option
PKG_RESUME_TRANSFERS=YES into
mk.conf.  If, during a fetch step, an incomplete
distfile is found, pkgsrc will try to resume it.
You can also
use a different program than the platform default program by changing the
FETCH_USING variable.  You can specify the program by
using of ftp, fetch, wget or curl.  Alternatively, fetching can be disabled
by using the value manual.  A value of custom disables the system defaults
and dependency tracking for the fetch program.  In that case you have to
provide FETCH_CMD, FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS,
FETCH_RESUME_ARGS, FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS,
FETCH_AFTER_ARGS.
For example, if you want to use
wget to download, you'll have to use something
like:
FETCH_USING= wget
If you want to use modular X.org from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11
(/usr/X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...)
you will have to add the following line into
mk.conf:
X11_TYPE=modular
If you are sitting behind a firewall which does not allow direct connections to Internet hosts (i.e. non-NAT), you may specify the relevant proxy hosts. This is done using an environment variable in the form of a URL, e.g. in Amdahl, the machine “orpheus.amdahl.com” is one of the firewalls, and it uses port 80 as the proxy port number. So the proxy environment variables are:
ftp_proxy=ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/ http_proxy=http://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
Some fetch tools are not prepared to support HTTPS by default (for example, the one in NetBSD 6.0), or the one installed by the pkgsrc bootstrap (to avoid an openssl dependency that low in the dependency graph).
Usually you won't notice, because distribution files are
mirrored weekly to “ftp.NetBSD.org”, but that might not
be often enough if you are following pkgsrc-current. In that case, set
FETCH_USING in your mk.conf file to
“curl” or “wget”, which are both compiled
with HTTPS support by default. Of course, these tools need to be
installed before you can use them this way.
This depends on which utility is used to retrieve distfiles.  From
bsd.pkg.mk, FETCH_CMD is assigned
the first available command from the following list:
${LOCALBASE}/bin/ftp
/usr/bin/ftp
On a default NetBSD installation, this will be
/usr/bin/ftp, which automatically tries passive
connections first, and falls back to active connections if the server
refuses to do passive.  For the other tools, add the following to your
mk.conf file:
PASSIVE_FETCH=1.
Having that option present will prevent
/usr/bin/ftp from falling back to active
transfers.
You would like to download all the distfiles in a single batch from work or university, where you can't run a make fetch. There is an archive of distfiles on ftp.NetBSD.org, but downloading the entire directory may not be appropriate.
The answer here is to do a make fetch-list in
/usr/pkgsrc or one of its subdirectories, carry the
resulting list to your machine at work/school and use it there.  If you
don't have a NetBSD-compatible ftp(1) (like tnftp) at work, don't
forget to set FETCH_CMD to something that fetches a
URL:
At home:
%cd /usr/pkgsrc%make fetch-list FETCH_CMD=wget DISTDIR=/tmp/distfiles >/tmp/fetch.sh%scp /tmp/fetch.sh work:/tmp
At work:
%sh /tmp/fetch.sh
then tar up /tmp/distfiles and take it
home.
If you have a machine running NetBSD, and you want to get all distfiles (even ones that aren't for your machine architecture), you can do so by using the above-mentioned make fetch-list approach, or fetch the distfiles directly by running:
%make mirror-distfiles
If you even decide to ignore
NO_{SRC,BIN}_ON_{FTP,CDROM}, then you can get everything
by running:
%make fetch NO_SKIP=yes
When compiling the pkgtools/pkg_install
package, you get the error from make that it doesn't know how to make
/usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc? This indicates that
you don't have installed the “text” set (nroff, ...) from
the NetBSD base distribution on your machine.  It is recommended to do
that to format man pages.
In the case of the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you
can get away with setting NOMAN=YES either in the
environment or in mk.conf.
You didn't install the compiler set, comp.tgz,
when you installed your NetBSD machine.  Please get and install it, by
extracting it in /:
#cd /#tar --unlink -zxvpf .../comp.tgz
comp.tgz is part of every NetBSD release.  Get
the one that corresponds to your release (determine via uname
-r).
When installing packages as non-root user and using the just-in-time
su(1) feature of pkgsrc, it can become annoying to type in the root
password for each required package installed.  To avoid this, the sudo
package can be used, which does password caching over a limited time.  To
use it, install sudo or
priv (either as binary package, from
security/priv, or
security/sudo) and then put the
following into your mk.conf, somewhere
after the definition of the
LOCALBASE variable:
.if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo)
SU_CMD=        ${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo -E /bin/sh -c
.endif
Note the -E flag; that tells sudo to preserve the environment. Without this, the bin-install target will fail when building a package with a non-default python version.
As the system administrator, you can choose where configuration files
are installed.  The default settings make all these files go into
${PREFIX}/etc or some of its subdirectories; this may
be suboptimal depending on your expectations (e.g., a read-only,
NFS-exported PREFIX with a need of per-machine
configuration of the provided packages).
In order to change the defaults, you can modify the
PKG_SYSCONFBASE variable (in
mk.conf) to point to your preferred configuration
directory; some common examples include /etc or
/etc/pkg.
Furthermore, you can change this value on a per-package basis by
setting the PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} variable.
PKG_SYSCONFVAR's value usually matches the name of the
package you would like to modify, that is, the contents of
PKGBASE.
Note that after changing these settings, you must rebuild and reinstall any affected packages.
Please be aware that there can often be bugs in third-party software,
and some of these bugs can leave a machine vulnerable to exploitation by
attackers.  In an effort to lessen the exposure, the NetBSD packages team
maintains a database of known-exploits to packages which have at one time
been included in pkgsrc.  The database can be downloaded automatically, and
a security audit of all packages installed on a system can take place.  To
do this, refer to the following two tools (installed as part of the
pkgtools/pkg_install package):
pkg_admin fetch-pkg-vulnerabilities, an easy way to download a list of the security vulnerabilities information. This list is kept up to date by the pkgsrc security team, and is distributed from the NetBSD ftp server:
https://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/vulns/pkg-vulnerabilities
pkg_admin audit, an easy way to audit the current machine, checking each known vulnerability. If a vulnerable package is installed, it will be shown by output to stdout, including a description of the type of vulnerability, and a URL containing more information.
Use of these tools is strongly recommended! See Section 5.1.6, “Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages” for instructions on how to automate checking and reporting.
If this database is installed, pkgsrc builds will use it to perform a security check before building any package.
When you add your own preferences to the
	CFLAGS variable in your
	mk.conf, these flags are passed in
	environment variables to the ./configure
	scripts and to make(1). Some package authors ignore the
	CFLAGS from the environment variable by
	overriding them in the Makefiles of their
	package.
Currently there is no solution to this problem. If you
	really need the package to use your CFLAGS
	you should run make patch in the package
	directory and then inspect any Makefile and
	Makefile.in for whether they define
	CFLAGS explicitly. Usually you can remove
	these lines. But be aware that some “smart”
	programmers write so bad code that it only works for the
	specific combination of CFLAGS they have
	chosen.
To find out where the CFLAGS are ignored, add the following lines to mk.conf:
CPPFLAGS+= -Dpkgsrc___CPPFLAGS CFLAGS+= -Dpkgsrc___CFLAGS CXXFLAGS+= -Dpkgsrc___CXXFLAGS
Then run bmake show-all-configure show-all-build to see whether the above flags are passed to the actual build commands in general.
To find out whether the flags are passed to individual compiler
commands, have a look at the file work/.work.log. In
most cases, the flags from the original command lines (the lines starting
with [*]) are passed unmodified to the actual compiler
(the lines starting with <.>). If the flag is
missing from the actual compiler command, it must have been removed by
the pkgsrc compiler wrappers.
Make sure that your copy of pkgsrc is consistent. A case that occurs often is that people only update pkgsrc in parts, because of performance reasons. Since pkgsrc is one large system, not a collection of many small systems, there are sometimes changes that only work when the whole pkgsrc tree is updated.
Make sure that you don't have any CVS conflicts. Search for “<<<<<<” or “>>>>>>” in all your pkgsrc files.
Make sure that you don't have old copies of the packages extracted. Run make clean clean-depends to verify this.
If you are a package developer who wants to invest some work, have a look at Chapter 21, Making your package work.
If the problem still exists, write a mail to the
	pkgsrc-users mailing list.
You have modified a file from pkgsrc, and someone else has
modified that same file afterwards in the CVS repository. Both changes
are in the same region of the file, so when you updated pkgsrc, the
cvs command marked the conflicting changes in the
file. Because of these markers, the file is no longer a valid
Makefile.
Have a look at that file, and if you don't need your local changes anymore, you can remove that file and run cvs -q update -dP in that directory to download the current version.
This part of the book deals with creating and modifying packages. It starts with a “HOWTO”-like guide on creating a new package. The remaining chapters are more like a reference manual for pkgsrc.
Table of Contents
MakefilesPLIST generationPLIST_SRCmk.confTo get help when developing pkgsrc, the definitive source is this document, the pkgsrc guide. If you don't find anything here, there are alternatives:
	The built-in pkgsrc help, which is available after bootstrapping
	pkgsrc. Run bmake help topic=… to get
	help for any topic, such as a variable name like
	BUILD_DEFS, a make target like
	do-build, a missing C or C++ function like
	strcasecmp or any other topic.
The available help topics are listed in Appendix E, Help topics.
	To see the value of a single variable, run bmake
	show-var VARNAME=X.
	To see the values of the most common variables, run
	bmake show-all. These variables are grouped by
	topic. To see the variables for a single topic, run
	bmake
	show-all-topic, for example
	bmake show-all-fetch.
The tech-pkg mailing list, to which you can subscribe and then ask your questions.
The #pkgsrc IRC channel, which is accessible via a web browser or by using a specialized chat program such as XChat. Pick any user name and join the channel #pkgsrc.
Table of Contents
Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of files involved which are described in the following sections.
Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all
  controlled by the package's Makefile.
  The Makefile describes various things about
  a package, for example from where to get it, how to configure,
  build, and install it.
A package Makefile contains several
  sections that describe the package.
In the first section there are the following variables, which should appear exactly in the order given here. The order and grouping of the variables is mostly historical and has no further meaning.
DISTNAME is the basename of the
    distribution file to be downloaded from the package's
    website.
PKGNAME is the name of the
    package, as used by pkgsrc. You need to provide it if
    DISTNAME (which is the default) is not a good
    name for the package in pkgsrc or DISTNAME is not
    provided (no distribution file is required).  Usually it is the pkgsrc
    directory name together with the version number. It must match the
    regular expression
    ^[A-Za-z0-9][A-Za-z0-9-_.+]*$, that is, it
    starts with a letter or digit, and contains only letters, digits,
    dashes, underscores, dots and plus signs.
    New packages should have entirely lower-case names, with the exception
    of some that must follow pre-existing conventions
    (e.g. R packages begin with R-).
    You can use the :tl variable modifier to lower-case
    the package name.
CATEGORIES is a list of categories
    which the package fits in. You can choose any of the top-level
    directories of pkgsrc for it.
Currently the following values are available for
    CATEGORIES. If more than
    one is used, they need to be separated by spaces:
archivers cross geography meta-pkgs security audio databases graphics misc shells benchmarks devel ham multimedia sysutils biology editors inputmethod net textproc cad emulators lang news time chat finance mail parallel wm comms fonts math pkgtools www converters games mbone print x11
MASTER_SITES,
    DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES,
    DIST_SUBDIR, EXTRACT_SUFX
    and DISTFILES are discussed in detail in
    Section 13.5, “The fetch phase”.
The second section contains information about separately downloaded patches, if any.
PATCHFILES:
    Name(s) of additional files that contain distribution patches.
    There is no default. pkgsrc will look for them at
    PATCH_SITES.
    They will automatically be uncompressed before patching if
    the names end with .gz or
    .Z.
PATCH_SITES:
    Primary location(s) for distribution patch files (see
    PATCHFILES above) if not found locally.
PATCH_DIST_STRIP:
    an argument to patch(1) that sets the pathname strip count to
    help find the correct files to patch. It defaults to
    -p0.
The third section contains the following variables.
MAINTAINER is the email address
    of the person who is currently responsible for this package.  In
    theory, the maintainer will be aware of upstream release, keep it
    updated, and generally resolve problems.  Others contemplating
    significant changes should ask the maintainer for advice or review
    of a proposed change.  This is not necessary for micro updates,
    bug fixes, pkgsrc-wide changes affecting many packages, and other
    things expected to be uncontroversial.  It goes with this "should
    ask" that the maintainer should respond to inquiries reasonably
    promptly (most of the time), and either approve changes or provide
    reasons why not.  Typically, when packaging a new program, set
    MAINTAINER to yourself.  If you don't intend to
    maintain the package (especially if you feel you have no special
    insight), set it to <pkgsrc-users@NetBSD.org>.  This
    special value is a code point indicating that there is no
    maintainer, but the variable is mandatory, absent
    OWNER.
OWNER can be used instead of
    MAINTAINER in relatively rare circumstances
    when the package is such that modifying it is riskier than normal.
    This is a stronger form of being the maintainer, with an
    expectation that others will ask for almost all changes, except
    revbumps and accommodating structural changes.  Someone who becomes
    OWNER has a strong obligation to keep the
    package very well maintained, to answer queries promptly and to be
    a steward of the package on behalf of users.  In this case,
    MAINTAINER should be omitted.
Because of the friction that OWNER adds,
    PMC may downgrade it to MAINTAINER at any
    time.
HOMEPAGE is a URL where users can
    find more information about the package.
COMMENT is a one-line
    description of the package (should not include the package
    name).
LICENSE indicates the license(s)
    applicable for the package. See Section 21.1.3, “Handling licenses” for further details.
Other variables that affect the build:
WRKSRC: The directory where the
      interesting distribution files of the package are found. The
      default is ${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}, which
      works for most packages.
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory for itself
      (most GNU software does, for instance), but extracts itself in
      the current directory, you should set
      WRKSRC=${WRKDIR}.
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory with the
      name of DISTNAME but some different name,
      set WRKSRC to point to the proper name in
      ${WRKDIR}, for example
      WRKSRC=${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}/unix. See
      lang/tcl and x11/tk for other examples.
The name of the working directory created by pkgsrc is
      taken from the WRKDIR_BASENAME
      variable. By default, its value is
      work. If you want to use the same
      pkgsrc tree for building different kinds of binary packages,
      you can change the variable according to your needs. Two
      other variables handle common cases of setting
      WRKDIR_BASENAME individually. If
      OBJHOSTNAME is defined in
      mk.conf, the first component of
      the host's name is attached to the directory name. If
      OBJMACHINE is defined, the platform name
      is attached, which might look like
      work.i386 or
      work.sparc.
Please pay attention to the following gotchas:
Add MANCOMPRESSED if man pages are
      installed in compressed form by the package.  For packages using
      BSD-style makefiles which honor MANZ, there is
      MANCOMPRESSED_IF_MANZ.
Replace /usr/local with
      “${PREFIX}” in all files (see patches,
      below).
If the package installs any info files, see Section 21.6.8, “Packages installing info files”.
The distinfo file contains the message
  digest, or checksum, of each distfile needed for the package. This
  ensures that the distfiles retrieved from the Internet have not been
  corrupted during transfer or altered by a malign force to introduce
  a security hole. To provide maximum security, all distfiles are
  protected using two different message digest algorithms (BLAKE2s
  and SHA512), as well as the file size.
The distinfo file also contains the
  checksums for all the patches found in the
  patches directory (see Section 12.3, “patches/*”). These checksums ensure that patches
  are only applied intentionally and that they don't accidentally change,
  e.g. when merging different changes together. They also make sure that
  new patches are actually added to CVS and old ones are removed.
  Too see whether the patches and the distinfo file
  match, run pkglint after changing the patches.
To regenerate the distinfo file, use the
  make distinfo command.
Some packages have different sets of distfiles depending on
  the platform, for example lang/openjdk8. These are kept in the same
  distinfo file and care should be taken when
  upgrading such a package to ensure distfile information is not
  lost.
Some packages don't work out-of-the box on the various
  platforms that are supported by pkgsrc. These packages need
  to be patched to make them work. The patch files can be
  found in the patches/ directory.
In the patch phase, these patches are
  applied to the files in WRKSRC directory after
  extracting them, in alphabetic order.
The patch-* files should be in
  diff -bu format, and apply without a fuzz to avoid
  problems. (To force patches to apply with fuzz you can set
  PATCH_FUZZ_FACTOR=-F2). Furthermore, each patch
  should contain only changes for a single file, and no file should be
  patched by more than one patch file. This helps to keep future
  modifications simple.
Each patch file is structured as follows: In the first line, there is the RCS Id of the patch itself. The second line should be empty for aesthetic reasons. After that, there should be a comment for each change that the patch does. There are a number of standard cases:
Patches for commonly known vulnerabilities should mention the vulnerability ID (CAN, CVE).
Patches that change source code should mention the platform and other environment (for example, the compiler) that the patch is needed for.
The patch should be commented so that any developer who knows the code of the application can make some use of the patch. Special care should be taken for the upstream developers, since we generally want that they accept our patches, so we have less work in the future.
One important thing to mention is to pay attention that no RCS
  IDs get stored in the patch files, as these will cause problems when
  later checked into the NetBSD CVS tree. Use the
  pkgdiff command from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package to avoid these
  problems.
For even more automation, we recommend using
  mkpatches from the same package to make a
  whole set of patches. You just have to back up files before you
  edit them to filename.orig, e.g., with
  cp -p filename filename.orig or, easier, by
  using pkgvi again from the same package. If
  you upgrade a package this way, you can easily compare the new
  set of patches with the previously existing one with
  patchdiff. The files in patches
  are replaced by new files, so carefully check if you want to take all
  the changes.
When you have finished a package, remember to generate
  the checksums for the patch files by using the make
  makepatchsum command, see Section 12.2, “distinfo”.
When adding a patch that corrects a problem in the distfile (rather than e.g. enforcing pkgsrc's view of where man pages should go), send the patch as a bug report to the maintainer. This benefits non-pkgsrc users of the package, and usually makes it possible to remove the patch in future version.
The file names of the patch files are usually of the form
  patch-.
  Many packages still use the previous convention
  path_to_file__with__underscores.cpatch-,
  but new patches should be of the form containing the filename.
  mkpatches included in [a-z][a-z]pkgtools/pkgdiff takes care of the name
  automatically.
When updating pre-existing patch files, if a file uses the old
  patch-
  convention, it's best not to change it to the new form, as that will
  just cause churn that makes it harder to track changes to patching
  over time. Similarly, if a patch now applies at different line offsets,
  but still applies cleanly as-is, there's no need to update it, as that
  also unnecessarily complicates the patch history.[a-z][a-z]
If you want to share patches between multiple packages
  in pkgsrc, e.g. because they use the same distfiles, set
  PATCHDIR to the path where the patch files
  can be found, e.g.:
PATCHDIR= ../../editors/xemacs/patches
Patch files that are distributed by the author or other
    maintainers can be listed in
    PATCHFILES.
If it is desired to store any patches that should not be
    committed into pkgsrc, they can be kept outside the pkgsrc
    tree in the $LOCALPATCHES directory. The
    directory tree there is expected to have the same
    “category/package” structure as pkgsrc, and
    patches are expected to be stored inside these dirs (also
    known as $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH). For
    example, if you want to keep a private patch for
    pkgsrc/graphics/png, keep it in
    $LOCALPATCHES/graphics/png/mypatch. All
    files in the named directory are expected to be patch files,
    and they are applied after pkgsrc patches are
    applied.
When fixing a portability issue in the code do not use preprocessor magic to check for the current operating system nor platform. Doing so hurts portability to other platforms because the OS-specific details are not abstracted appropriately.
The general rule to follow is: instead of checking for the
      operating system the application is being built on, check for the
      specific features you need.  For example,
      instead of assuming that kqueue is available under NetBSD and
      using the __NetBSD__ macro to conditionalize
      kqueue support, add a check that detects kqueue itself —
      yes, this generally involves patching the
      configure script.  There is absolutely nothing
      that prevents some OSes from adopting interfaces from other OSes
      (e.g. Linux implementing kqueue), something that the above checks
      cannot take into account.
Of course, checking for features generally involves more work on the developer's side, but the resulting changes are cleaner and there are chances they will work on many other platforms. Not to mention that there are higher chances of being later integrated into the mainstream sources. Remember: It doesn't work unless it is right!
Some typical examples:
Table 12.1. Patching examples
| Where | Incorrect | Correct | 
|---|---|---|
| configure script | 
case ${target_os} in
netbsd*) have_kvm=yes ;;
*)       have_kvm=no  ;;
esac
 | AC_CHECK_LIB(kvm, kvm_open, have_kvm=yes, have_kvm=no) | 
| C source file | #if defined(__NetBSD__) # include <sys/event.h> #endif | #if defined(HAVE_SYS_EVENT_H) # include <sys/event.h> #endif | 
| C source file | 
int
monitor_file(...)
{
#if defined(__NetBSD__)
        int fd = kqueue();
        ...
#else
        ...
#endif
}
 | 
int
monitor_file(...)
{
#if defined(HAVE_KQUEUE)
        int fd = kqueue();
        ...
#else
        ...
#endif
}
 | 
Always, always, always feed back any portability fixes or improvements you do to a package to the mainstream developers. This is the only way to get their attention on portability issues and to ensure that future versions can be built out-of-the box on NetBSD. Furthermore, any user that gets newer distfiles will get the fixes straight from the packaged code.
This generally involves cleaning up the patches (because sometimes the patches that are added to pkgsrc are quick hacks), filing bug reports in the appropriate trackers for the projects and working with the mainstream authors to accept your changes. It is extremely important that you do it so that the packages in pkgsrc are kept simple and thus further changes can be done without much hassle.
When you have done this, please add a URL to the upstream bug report to the patch comment.
Support the idea of free software!
DESCRA multi-line description of the piece of software. This should include any credits where they are due. Please bear in mind that others do not share your sense of humour (or spelling idiosyncrasies), and that others will read everything that you write here.
PLISTThis file governs the files that are installed on your system: all the binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of directories, and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 19, PLIST issues for more information.
INSTALLThis shell script is invoked twice by pkg_add(1).
	    First time after package extraction and before files are
	    moved in place, the second time after the files to install
	    are moved in place. This can be used to do any custom
	    procedures not possible with @exec commands in
	    PLIST. See pkg_add(1) and
	    pkg_create(1) for more information.  See also Section 20.1, “Files and directories outside the installation prefix”.
	    Please note that you can modify variables in it easily by using
	    FILES_SUBST in the package's
	    Makefile:
FILES_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
replaces "@SOMEVAR@" with “somevalue” in the
	    INSTALL.  By default, substitution is
	    performed for PREFIX,
	    LOCALBASE, X11BASE,
	    VARBASE, and a few others, type
	    make help topic=FILES_SUBST for a
	    complete list.
DEINSTALLThis script is executed before and after any files are removed.  It is
	    this script's responsibility to clean up any additional messy details
	    around the package's installation, since all pkg_delete knows is how to
	    delete the files created in the original distribution.
	    See pkg_delete(1)
	    and pkg_create(1) for more information.
	    The same methods to replace variables can be used as for
	    the INSTALL file.
MESSAGEThis file is displayed after installation of the package. While this was used often in the past, it has two problems: the display will be missed if many packages are installed at once, and the person installing the package and the one using or configuring it may be different. It should therefore be used only in exceptional circumstances where lasting negative consequences would result from someone not reading it.
MESSAGE should not be used for:
exhortations to read the documentation
reminders to install rc.d files and set variables
anything that should be explained in the installation/configuration documentation that should come with the package
If the documentation provided by upstream needs enhancing, create e.g. files/README.pkgsrc and install it in the package's documentation directory.
Note that MESSAGE is shown for all operating systems and all init systems. If a MESSAGE is necessary, it should be narrowed to only those operating systems and init systems to which it applies.
Note that you can modify variables in it easily by using
	    MESSAGE_SUBST in the package's
	    Makefile:
MESSAGE_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
replaces "${SOMEVAR}" with “somevalue” in
	    MESSAGE.  By default, substitution is
	    performed for PKGNAME,
	    PKGBASE, PREFIX,
	    LOCALBASE, X11BASE,
	    PKG_SYSCONFDIR,
	    ROOT_GROUP, and
	    ROOT_USER.
You can display a different or additional files by
	    setting the MESSAGE_SRC variable.  Its
	    default is MESSAGE, if the file
	    exists.
ALTERNATIVESThis file is used by the alternatives framework. It creates, configures, and destroys generic wrappers used to run programs with similar interfaces. See pkg_alternatives(8) from pkgtools/pkg_alternatives for more information.
Each line of the file contains two filenames, first
	    the wrapper and then the alternative provided by the package.
	    Both paths are relative to PREFIX.
Makefile.commonThis file contains arbitrary things that could
	also go into a Makefile, but its purpose is
	to be used by more than one package. This file should only be
	used when the packages that will use the file are known in
	advance. For other purposes it is often better to write a
	*.mk file and give it a good name that
	describes what it does.
buildlink3.mkThis file contains the dependency information for the buildlink3 framework (see Chapter 18, Buildlink methodology).
hacks.mkThis file contains workarounds for compiler bugs
	and similar things. It is included automatically by the pkgsrc
	infrastructure, so you don't need an extra
	.include line for
	it.
options.mkThis file contains the code for the
	package-specific options (see Chapter 16, Options handling) that can be
	selected by the user. If a package has only one or two options,
	it is equally acceptable to put the code directly into the
	Makefile.
When you type make, the distribution files are
    unpacked into the directory denoted by
    WRKDIR. It can be removed by running
    make clean. Besides the sources, this
    directory is also used to keep various timestamp files.
    The directory gets removed completely on clean.
    The default is ${.CURDIR}/work
    or ${.CURDIR}/work.${MACHINE_ARCH}
    if OBJMACHINE is set.
If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior to configuration or building, you can place these files here and use a ${CP} command in the “post-extract” target to achieve this.
If you want to share files in this way with other
    packages, set the FILESDIR variable to point
    to the other package's files directory,
    e.g.:
FILESDIR= ../../editors/xemacs/files
Table of Contents
This chapter gives a detailed description on how a package is
    built. Building a package is separated into different
    phases (for example fetch,
    build, install), all of which are
    described in the following sections. Each phase is split into
    so-called stages, which take the name of the
    containing phase, prefixed by one of pre-,
    do- or post-. (Examples are
    pre-configure, post-build.) Most
    of the actual work is done in the do-* stages.
Never override the regular targets (like
    fetch), if you have to, override the
    do-* ones instead.
The basic steps for building a program are always the same. First the program's source (distfile) must be brought to the local system and then extracted. After any pkgsrc-specific patches to compile properly are applied, the software can be configured, then built (usually by compiling), and finally the generated binaries, etc. can be put into place on the system.
To get more details about what is happening at each step,
    you can set the PKG_VERBOSE variable, or the
    PATCH_DEBUG variable if you are just interested
    in more details about the patch step.
Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in the next section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are installed, and which variables influence this.
The automatic variable PREFIX indicates
    where all files of the final program shall be installed. It is
    usually set to LOCALBASE
    (/usr/pkg), or CROSSBASE
    for pkgs in the cross category.  The value of
    PREFIX needs to be put
    into the various places in the program's source where paths to
    these files are encoded.  See Section 12.3, “patches/*” and Section 21.3.1, “Shared libraries - libtool” for more details.
When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
PREFIX always points to the location
	where the current pkg will be installed.  When referring to a
	pkg's own installation path, use
	“${PREFIX}”.
LOCALBASE is where all pkgs
	are installed.  If you need to construct a -I or -L argument
	to the compiler to find includes and libraries installed by
	another pkg, use “${LOCALBASE}”. The name
	LOCALBASE stems from FreeBSD, which
	installed all packages in /usr/local. As
	pkgsrc leaves /usr/local for the system
	administrator, this variable is a misnomer.
X11BASE is where the actual X11
	distribution (from xsrc, etc.) is installed. When looking for
	standard X11 includes (not those
	installed by a package), use “${X11BASE}”.
X11-based packages using imake must set
	USE_IMAKE to be installed correctly under
	LOCALBASE.
Within ${PREFIX}, packages should
	install files according to hier(7), with the exception that
	manual pages go into ${PREFIX}/man, not
	${PREFIX}/share/man.
When building a package, various directories are used to store source files, temporary files, pkgsrc-internal files, and so on. These directories are explained here.
Some of the directory variables contain relative pathnames. There
    are two common base directories for these relative directories:
    PKGSRCDIR/PKGPATH is used for directories that are
    pkgsrc-specific. WRKSRC is used for directories
    inside the package itself.
PKGSRCDIRThis is an absolute pathname that points to the pkgsrc root directory. Generally, you don't need it.
PKGDIRThis is an absolute pathname that points to the current package.
PKGPATHThis is a pathname relative to
      PKGSRCDIR that points to the current package.
      It is defined after including bsd.prefs.mk
      and can be used in makefile fragments that are used by several
      packages to distinguish between these packages. Other variables
      that would serve the same purpose are PKGBASE
      and PKGNAME, but these are only defined after
      including bsd.pkg.mk, which is too
      late.
In mk.conf, the pkgsrc user can use
      PKGPATH to tweak variables like
      MAKE_JOBS and
      CFLAGS.
WRKDIRThis is an absolute pathname pointing to the directory where all work takes place. The distfiles are extracted to this directory. It also contains temporary directories and log files used by the various pkgsrc frameworks, like buildlink or the wrappers.
WRKSRCThis is an absolute pathname pointing to the directory
      where the distfiles are extracted. It is usually a direct subdirectory
      of WRKDIR, and often it's the only directory entry
      that isn't hidden. This variable may be changed by a package
      Makefile.
The CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK definition takes either
    the value yes or no and defaults
    to no. It indicates whether a symbolic link to the
    WRKDIR is to be created in the pkgsrc entry's directory.
    If users would like to have their pkgsrc trees behave in a
    read-only manner, then the value of
    CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK should be set to
    no.
You can run a particular phase by typing make
    phase, where
    phase is the name of the phase. This will
    automatically run all phases that are required for this phase. The
    default phase is build, that is, when you run
    make without parameters in a package directory,
    the package will be built, but not installed.
The first step in building a package is to fetch the distribution files (distfiles) from the sites that are providing them. This is the task of the fetch phase.
In simple cases, MASTER_SITES
      defines all URLs from where the distfile, whose name is
      derived from the DISTNAME variable, is
      fetched. The more complicated cases are described
      below.
The variable DISTFILES specifies
      the list of distfiles that have to be fetched. Its value
      defaults to ${DEFAULT_DISTFILES} and
      its value is ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX},
      so that most packages don't need to define it at all.
      EXTRACT_SUFX is
      .tar.gz by default, but can be changed
      freely. Note that if your package requires additional
      distfiles to the default one, you cannot just append the
      additional filenames using the +=
      operator, but you have write for example:
DISTFILES=      ${DEFAULT_DISTFILES} additional-files.tar.gz
Each distfile is fetched from a list of sites, usually
      MASTER_SITES. If the package has multiple
      DISTFILES or multiple
      PATCHFILES from different sites, you can
      set
      SITES.
      to the list of URLs where the file
      distfiledistfile
DISTFILES=      ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
DISTFILES+=     foo-file.tar.gz
SITES.foo-file.tar.gz= \
https://www.somewhere.com/somehow/ \
https://www.somewhereelse.com/mirror/somehow/
When actually fetching the distfiles, each item from
      MASTER_SITES or
      SITES.* gets the name of each distfile
      appended to it, without an intermediate slash. Therefore,
      all site values have to end with a slash or other separator
      character. This allows for example to set
      MASTER_SITES to a URL of a CGI script
      that gets the name of the distfile as a parameter. In this
      case, the definition would look like:
MASTER_SITES= https://www.example.com/download.cgi?file=
 The exception to this rule are URLs starting with a dash.
      In that case the URL is taken as is, fetched and the result
      stored under the name of the distfile. You can use this style
      for the case when the download URL style does not match the
      above common case. For example, if permanent download URL is a
      redirector to the real download URL, or the download file name
      is offered by an HTTP Content-Disposition header. In the
      following example, foo-1.0.0.tar.gz will be
      created instead of the default
      v1.0.0.tar.gz.
DISTNAME= foo-1.0.0 MASTER_SITES= -https://www.example.com/archive/v1.0.0.tar.gz
There are some predefined values for
      MASTER_SITES, which can be used in
      packages.  The names of the variables should speak for
      themselves.
| MASTER_SITE_APACHE | MASTER_SITE_BACKUP | 
| MASTER_SITE_CRATESIO | MASTER_SITE_CYGWIN | 
| MASTER_SITE_DEBIAN | MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD | 
| MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD_LOCAL | MASTER_SITE_GENTOO | 
| MASTER_SITE_GITHUB | MASTER_SITE_GITLAB | 
| MASTER_SITE_GNOME | MASTER_SITE_GNU | 
| MASTER_SITE_GNUPG | MASTER_SITE_GNUSTEP | 
| MASTER_SITE_HASKELL_HACKAGE | MASTER_SITE_IFARCHIVE | 
| MASTER_SITE_KDE | MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA | 
| MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA_ALL | MASTER_SITE_MYSQL | 
| MASTER_SITE_NETLIB | MASTER_SITE_OPENBSD | 
| MASTER_SITE_OPENOFFICE | MASTER_SITE_OSDN | 
| MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN | MASTER_SITE_PGSQL | 
| MASTER_SITE_PYPI | MASTER_SITE_RUBYGEMS | 
| MASTER_SITE_R_CRAN | MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE | 
| MASTER_SITE_SUNSITE | MASTER_SITE_SUSE | 
| MASTER_SITE_TEX_CTAN | MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB | 
| MASTER_SITE_XEMACS | MASTER_SITE_XORG | 
Some explanations for the less self-explaining ones:
      MASTER_SITE_BACKUP contains backup sites
      for packages that are maintained in ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}.  MASTER_SITE_LOCAL contains local
      package source distributions that are maintained in ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/distfiles/LOCAL_PORTS/.
If you choose one of these predefined sites, you may want to specify a subdirectory of that site. Since these macros may expand to more than one actual site, you must use the following construct to specify a subdirectory:
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GNU:=subdirectory/name/}
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=project_name/}
Note the trailing slash after the subdirectory name.
The fetch phase makes sure that
      all the distfiles exist in a local directory
      (DISTDIR, which can be set by the pkgsrc
      user). If the files do not exist, they are fetched using
      commands of the form
${FETCH_CMD} ${FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS} ${site}${file} ${FETCH_AFTER_ARGS}
where ${site} varies through
      several possibilities in turn: first,
      MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE is tried, then the
      sites specified in either SITES.file if
      defined, else MASTER_SITES or
      PATCH_SITES, as applies, then finally the
      value of MASTER_SITE_BACKUP. The order of
      all except the first and the last can be optionally sorted
      by the user, via setting either
      MASTER_SORT_RANDOM, and
      MASTER_SORT_AWK or
      MASTER_SORT_REGEX.
 The specific command and arguments used depend on the
      FETCH_USING parameter. The example above is
      for FETCH_USING=custom.
The distfiles mirror run by the NetBSD Foundation uses the
      mirror-distfiles target to mirror the
      distfiles, if they are freely distributable.  Packages setting
      NO_SRC_ON_FTP (usually to
      “${RESTRICTED}”) will not have their distfiles
      mirrored.
After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and compared with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the checksums don't match, the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same distfile is used for building, and that the distfile wasn't changed, e.g. by some malign force, deliberately changed distfiles on the master distribution site or network lossage.
When the distfiles are present on the local system, they need to be extracted, as they usually come in the form of some compressed archive format.
By default, all DISTFILES are
    extracted. If you only need some of them, you can set the
    EXTRACT_ONLY variable to the list of those
    files.
Extracting the files is usually done by a little
    program, mk/extract/extract, which
    already knows how to extract various archive formats, so most
    likely you will not need to change anything here. But if you
    need, the following variables may help you:
EXTRACT_OPTS_{BIN,LHA,PAX,RAR,TAR,ZIP,ZOO}Use these variables to override the default
      options for an extract command, which are defined in
      mk/extract/extract.
EXTRACT_USINGThis variable can be set to
      bsdtar, gtar, nbtar
      (which is the default value), pax, or an
      absolute pathname pointing to the command with which tar
      archives should be extracted.  It is preferred to choose bsdtar over gtar
      if NetBSD's pax-as-tar is not good enough.
If the extract program doesn't
    serve your needs, you can also override the
    EXTRACT_CMD variable, which holds the
    command used for extracting the files. This command is
    executed in the ${WRKSRC}
    directory. During execution of this command, the shell
    variable extract_file holds the absolute
    pathname of the file that is going to be extracted.
And if that still does not suffice, you can override the
    do-extract target in the package
    Makefile.
After extraction, all the patches named by the
    PATCHFILES, those present in the patches
    subdirectory of the package as well as in
    $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH (e.g.
    /usr/local/patches/graphics/png) are
    applied.  Patchfiles ending in .Z or
    .gz are uncompressed before they are
    applied, files ending in .orig or
    .rej are ignored. Any special options to
    patch(1) can be handed in
    PATCH_DIST_ARGS.  See Section 12.3, “patches/*” for more details.
By default patch(1) is given special arguments to make it fail if the expected text from the patch context is not found in the patched file. If that happens, fix the patch file by comparing it with the actual text in the file to be patched.
This is covered in Chapter 17, Tools needed for building or running.
This phase creates wrapper programs for the compilers and linkers. The following variables can be used to tweak the wrappers.
ECHO_WRAPPER_MSGThe command used to print progress
      messages. Does nothing by default. Set to
      ${ECHO} to see the progress
      messages.
WRAPPER_DEBUGThis variable can be set to
      yes (default) or no,
      depending on whether you want additional information in the
      wrapper log file.
WRAPPER_UPDATE_CACHEThis variable can be set to
      yes or no, depending
      on whether the wrapper should use its cache, which will
      improve the speed. The default value is
      yes, but is forced to
      no if the platform does not support
      it.
WRAPPER_REORDER_CMDSA list of reordering commands. A reordering
      command has the form
      reorder:l:.
      It ensures that that
      lib1:lib2-l occurs
      before lib1-l.
      lib2
Most pieces of software need information on the header files, system calls, and library routines which are available on the platform they run on. The process of determining this information is known as configuration, and is usually automated. In most cases, a script is supplied with the distfiles, and its invocation results in generation of header files, Makefiles, etc.
If the package contains a configure script, this can be
    invoked by setting HAS_CONFIGURE to
    “yes”. If the configure script is a GNU autoconf
    script, you should set GNU_CONFIGURE to
    “yes” instead.
In the do-configure stage, a rough
    equivalent of the following command is run. See
    mk/configure/configure.mk, target
    do-configure-script for the exact
    definition.
.for dir in ${CONFIGURE_DIRS}
        cd ${WRKSRC} && cd ${dir} \
        && env ${CONFIGURE_ENV} \
            ${CONFIG_SHELL} ${CONFIGURE_SCRIPT} ${CONFIGURE_ARGS}
.endfor
CONFIGURE_DIRS (default:
    “.”) is a list of pathnames relative to
    WRKSRC. In each of these directories, the
    configure script is run with the environment
    CONFIGURE_ENV and arguments
    CONFIGURE_ARGS. The variables
    CONFIGURE_ENV,
    CONFIGURE_SCRIPT (default:
    “./configure”) and
    CONFIGURE_ARGS may all be changed by the
    package.
If the program uses the Perl way of configuration (mainly Perl
    modules, but not only), i.e. a file called
    Makefile.PL, it should include
    ../../lang/perl5/module.mk. To set any parameter for
    Makefile.PL use the MAKE_PARAMS
    variable (e.g., MAKE_PARAMS+=foo=bar
If the program uses an Imakefile
    for configuration, the appropriate steps can be invoked by
    setting USE_IMAKE to
    “yes”.  If you only need xmkmf, add it to USE_TOOLS.
    You can add variables to xmkmf's environment by adding them to the
    SCRIPTS_ENV variable.
If the program uses cmake
    for configuration, the appropriate steps can be invoked by
    including ../../devel/cmake/build.mk.
    You can add variables to cmake's environment by adding them to the
    CONFIGURE_ENV variable and arguments to cmake
    by adding them to the CMAKE_CONFIGURE_ARGS variable.
    If you want to add arguments only for particular stages, you can use the
    CMAKE_CONFIGURE_ARGS,
    CMAKE_BUILD_ARGS, and
    CMAKE_INSTALL_ARGS variables.
    You can set the CONFIGURE_DIRS variable to the
    directories in which CMake should be run, relative to
    WRKSRC. This defaults to to “.”.
    
Any package using the now-deprecated
    USE_CMAKE=yes should be converted.
    Essentially, replace with an include of
    ../../devel/cmake/build.mk, prune creation of a build
    directory and settings to use it, and check/fix settings that
    intend to perform the build in a subdirectory.
    
If there is no configure step at all, set
    NO_CONFIGURE to “yes”.
For building a package, a rough equivalent of the following
    code is executed; see mk/build/build.mk, target
    do-build for the exact definition.
.for dir in ${BUILD_DIRS}
        cd ${WRKSRC} && cd ${dir} \
        && env ${MAKE_ENV} \
            ${MAKE_PROGRAM} ${MAKE_FLAGS} ${BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS} \
                -f ${MAKE_FILE} \
                ${BUILD_TARGET}
.endfor
BUILD_DIRS (default:
    “.”) is a list of pathnames relative to
    WRKSRC. In each of these directories,
    MAKE_PROGRAM is run with the environment
    MAKE_ENV and arguments
    BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS. The variables
    MAKE_ENV,
    BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS,
    MAKE_FILE and
    BUILD_TARGET may all be changed by the
    package.
The default value of MAKE_PROGRAM is
    “gmake” if USE_TOOLS contains
    “gmake”, “make” otherwise. The
    default value of MAKE_FILE is
    “Makefile”, and BUILD_TARGET
    defaults to “all”.
If there is no build step at all, set
    NO_BUILD to “yes”.
Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to install the software in public directories, so users can access the programs and files.
In the install phase, a rough equivalent
    of the following code is executed; see
    mk/install/install.mk, target
    do-install for the exact definition. Additionally,
    before and after this code, several consistency checks are run
    against the files-to-be-installed, see
    mk/check/*.mk for details.
.for dir in ${INSTALL_DIRS}
        cd ${WRKSRC} && cd ${dir} \
        && env ${INSTALL_ENV} ${MAKE_ENV} \
            ${MAKE_PROGRAM} ${MAKE_FLAGS} ${INSTALL_MAKE_FLAGS} \
                -f ${MAKE_FILE} ${INSTALL_TARGET}
.endfor
The variable's meanings are analogous to the ones in the
    build phase.
    INSTALL_DIRS defaults to
    BUILD_DIRS. INSTALL_TARGET
    is “install” by default, plus
    “install.man” if USE_IMAKE is
    defined and NO_INSTALL_MANPAGES is not
    defined.
In the install phase, the following
    variables are useful. They are all variations of the
    install(1) command that have the owner, group and
    permissions preset. INSTALL is the plain
    install command. The specialized variants, together with their
    intended use, are:
INSTALL_PROGRAM_DIRdirectories that contain binaries
INSTALL_SCRIPT_DIRdirectories that contain scripts
INSTALL_LIB_DIRdirectories that contain shared and static libraries
INSTALL_DATA_DIRdirectories that contain data files
INSTALL_MAN_DIRdirectories that contain man pages
INSTALL_GAME_DIRdirectories that contain data files for games
INSTALL_PROGRAMbinaries that can be stripped from debugging symbols
INSTALL_SCRIPTbinaries that cannot be stripped
INSTALL_GAMEgame binaries
INSTALL_LIBshared and static libraries
INSTALL_DATAdata files
INSTALL_GAME_DATAdata files for games
INSTALL_MANman pages
Some other variables are:
INSTALL_UNSTRIPPEDIf set to yes, do not run strip(1)
      when installing binaries. Any debugging sections and symbols present in
      binaries will be preserved.
      
INSTALLATION_DIRSA list of directories relative to
      PREFIX that are created by pkgsrc at the
      beginning of the install phase.
      The package is supposed to create all needed directories itself
      before installing files to it and list all other directories here.
      
In the rare cases that a package shouldn't install anything,
    set NO_INSTALL to “yes”. This is
    mostly relevant for packages in the regress
    category.
Once the install stage has completed, a binary package of the installed files can be built. These binary packages can be used for quick installation without previous compilation, e.g. by the make bin-install or by using pkg_add.
By default, the binary packages are created in
    ${PACKAGES}/All and symlinks are created in
    ${PACKAGES}/,
    one for each category in the categoryCATEGORIES
    variable.  PACKAGES defaults to
    pkgsrc/packages.
Once you're finished with a package, you can clean the work directory by running make clean. If you want to clean the work directories of all dependencies too, use make clean-depends.
For any of the main targets described in the previous section (configure, build, install, etc.), two auxiliary targets exist with “pre-” and “post-” used as a prefix for the main target's name. These targets are invoked before and after the main target is called, allowing extra configuration or installation steps be performed from a package's Makefile, for example, which a program's configure script or install target omitted.
About 5% of the pkgsrc packages define their custom post-extract target, another 5% define pre-configure, and 10% define post-install. The other pre/post-* targets are defined even less often.
Should one of the main targets do the wrong thing, and should there be no variable to fix this, you can redefine it with the do-* target. (Note that redefining the target itself instead of the do-* target is a bad idea, as the pre-* and post-* targets won't be called anymore, etc.)
About 15% of the pkgsrc packages override the default do-install, the other do-* targets are overridden even less often.
If you did a make install and you noticed some file was not installed properly, you can repeat the installation with this target, which will ignore the “already installed” flag.
This is the default value of
	  DEPENDS_TARGET except in the case of
	  make update and make
	  package, where the defaults are
	  “package” and “update”,
	  respectively.
This target does a pkg_delete(1) in the current directory, effectively de-installing the package. The following variables can be used to tune the behaviour:
PKG_VERBOSEAdd a "-v" to the pkg_delete(1) command.
DEINSTALLDEPENDSRemove all packages that require (depend on)
		the given package.  This can be used to remove any
		packages that may have been pulled in by a given
		package, e.g. if make deinstall
		DEINSTALLDEPENDS=1 is done in
		pkgsrc/x11/kde, this is
		likely to remove whole KDE. Works by adding
		“-R” to the pkg_delete(1)
		command line.
Install a binary package from local disk and via FTP
	  from a list of sites (see the
	  BINPKG_SITES variable), and do a
	  make package if no binary package is
	  available anywhere.  The arguments given to
	  pkg_add can be set via
	  BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS e.g., to do verbose
	  operation, etc.
This target removes the state files for the "install" and later phases so that the "install" target may be re-invoked. This can be used after editing the PLIST to install the package without rebuilding it.
This target removes the state files for the "build" and later phases so that the "build" target may be re-invoked.
This target causes the current package to be
	  updated to the latest version.  The package and all
	  depending packages first get de-installed, then current
	  versions of the corresponding packages get compiled and
	  installed.  This is similar to manually noting which
	  packages are currently installed, then performing a
	  series of make deinstall and
	  make install (or whatever
	  UPDATE_TARGET is set to) for these
	  packages.
You can use the “update” target to
	  resume package updating in case a previous make
	  update was interrupted for some reason.
	  However, in this case, make sure you don't call
	  make clean or otherwise remove the
	  list of dependent packages in WRKDIR.
	  Otherwise, you lose the ability to automatically update
	  the current package along with the dependent packages
	  you have installed.
Resuming an interrupted make update will only work as long as the package tree remains unchanged. If the source code for one of the packages to be updated has been changed, resuming make update will most certainly fail!
The following variables can be used either on the
	  command line or in mk.conf to
	  alter the behaviour of make
	  update:
UPDATE_TARGETInstall target to recursively use for the
		updated package and the dependent packages.
		Defaults to DEPENDS_TARGET if
		set, “install” otherwise for
		make update.  Other good
		targets are “package” or
		“bin-install”.  Do not set this to
		“update” or you will get stuck in an
		endless loop!
NOCLEANDon't clean up after updating. Useful if you want to leave the work sources of the updated packages around for inspection or other purposes. Be sure you eventually clean up the source tree (see the “clean-update” target below) or you may run into troubles with old source code still lying around on your next make or make update.
REINSTALLDeinstall each package before installing
		(making DEPENDS_TARGET). This
		may be necessary if the
		“clean-update” target (see below) was
		called after interrupting a running make
		update.
DEPENDS_TARGETAllows you to disable recursion and hardcode
		the target for packages.  The default is
		“update” for the update target,
		facilitating a recursive update of prerequisite
		packages.  Only set
		DEPENDS_TARGET if you want to
		disable recursive updates. Use
		UPDATE_TARGET instead to just
		set a specific target for each package to be
		installed during make update
		(see above).
Clean the source tree for all packages that would
	  get updated if make update was called
	  from the current directory.  This target should not be
	  used if the current package (or any of its depending
	  packages) have already been de-installed (e.g., after
	  calling make update) or you may lose
	  some packages you intended to update. As a rule of
	  thumb: only use this target before
	  the first time you run make update
	  and only if you have a dirty package tree (e.g., if you
	  used NOCLEAN).
If you are unsure about whether your tree is clean, you can either perform a make clean at the top of the tree, or use the following sequence of commands from the directory of the package you want to update (before running make update for the first time, otherwise you lose all the packages you wanted to update!):
#make clean-update#make clean CLEANDEPENDS=YES#make update
The following variables can be used either on the
	  command line or in mk.conf to alter the behaviour of
	  make clean-update:
CLEAR_DIRLISTAfter make clean, do not
		reconstruct the list of directories to update for
		this package.  Only use this if make
		update successfully installed all
		packages you wanted to update.  Normally, this is
		done automatically on make
		update, but may have been suppressed by
		the NOCLEAN variable (see
		above).
Update the installation of the current package.  This
	  differs from update in that it does not replace dependent
	  packages.  You will need to install pkgtools/pkg_tarup for this
	  target to work.
Be careful when using this target! There are no guarantees that dependent packages will still work, in particular they will most certainly break if you make replace a library package whose shared library major version changed between your installed version and the new one. For this reason, this target is not officially supported and only recommended for advanced users.
This target invokes pkg_info(1) for the current package. You can use this to check which version of a package is installed.
This is a top-level command, i.e. it should be used in
	  the pkgsrc directory.  It creates a
	  database of all packages in the local pkgsrc tree, including
	  dependencies, comment, maintainer, and some other useful
	  information.  Individual entries are created by running
	  make describe in the packages'
	  directories.  This index file is saved as
	  pkgsrc/INDEX.  It can be displayed in
	  verbose format by running make
	  print-index.  You can search in it with
	  make search
	  key=something.  You can
	  extract a list of all packages that depend on a particular
	  one by running make show-deps
	  PKG=somepackage.
Running this command takes a very long time, some hours even on fast machines!
This target generates a
	  index.html file, which can be
	  viewed using a browser such as www/firefox or www/links.  The generated files
	  contain references to any packages which are in the
	  PACKAGES directory on the local
	  host. The generated files can be made to refer to URLs
	  based on FTP_PKG_URL_HOST and
	  FTP_PKG_URL_DIR. For example, if I
	  wanted to generate index.html
	  files which pointed to binary packages on the local
	  machine, in the directory
	  /usr/packages, set
	  FTP_PKG_URL_HOST=file://localhost and
	  FTP_PKG_URL_DIR=/usr/packages. The
	  ${PACKAGES} directory and its
	  subdirectories will be searched for all the binary
	  packages.
The target can be run at the toplevel or in category directories, in which case it descends recursively.
This is a top-level command, run it in
	  pkgsrc.  Use this target to create a
	  file README-all.html which contains a
	  list of all packages currently available in the NetBSD
	  Packages Collection, together with the category they belong
	  to and a short description. This file is compiled from the
	  pkgsrc/*/index.html files, so be sure
	  to run this after a make
	  readme.
This is very much the same as the
	  “readme” target (see above), but is to be
	  used when generating a pkgsrc tree to be written to a
	  CD-ROM.  This target also produces
	  index.html files, and can be made
	  to refer to URLs based on
	  CDROM_PKG_URL_HOST and
	  CDROM_PKG_URL_DIR.
This target shows which distfiles and patchfiles
	  are needed to build the package
	  (ALLFILES, which contains all
	  DISTFILES and
	  PATCHFILES, but not
	  patches/*).
This target shows nothing if the package is not installed. If a version of this package is installed, but is not the version provided in this version of pkgsrc, then a warning message is displayed. This target can be used to show which of your installed packages are downlevel, and so the old versions can be deleted, and the current ones added.
This target shows the directory in the pkgsrc hierarchy from which the package can be built and installed. This may not be the same directory as the one from which the package was installed. This target is intended to be used by people who may wish to upgrade many packages on a single host, and can be invoked from the top-level pkgsrc Makefile by using the “show-host-specific-pkgs” target.
This target shows which installed packages match
	  the current package's DEPENDS. Useful
	  if out of date dependencies are causing build
	  problems.
This target shows the list of packages that the current package depends on for building.
This target shows the list of packages that the current package depends on for running.
After a package is installed, check all its
	  binaries and (on ELF platforms) shared libraries to see
	  if they find the shared libs they need.  Run by default
	  if PKG_DEVELOPER is set in mk.conf.
After a “make install” from a new or
	  upgraded pkg, this prints out an attempt to generate a
	  new PLIST from a find
	  -newer work/.extract_done.  An attempt is made
	  to care for shared libs etc., but it is
	  strongly recommended to review the
	  result before putting it into
	  PLIST. On upgrades, it's useful to
	  diff the output of this command against an already
	  existing PLIST file.
If the package installs files via tar(1) or
	  other methods that don't update file access times, be
	  sure to add these files manually to your
	  PLIST, as the “find
	  -newer” command used by this target won't catch
	  them!
See Section 19.3, “Tweaking output of make print-PLIST” for more information on this target.
If you did a make build and you noticed some further modifications of sources are needed, you can repeat the build with this target, which will ignore the “already built” flag. This target is helpful while working with patches.
If you did a make package and you noticed some further modifications of sources are needed, you can repeat the package with this target, which will ignore the “already packaged” flag. This target is helpful while working with patches, PLIST* files etc.
If you did a make test and you noticed some further modifications of sources are needed, you can repeat the test with this target, which will ignore the “already tested” flag. This target is helpful while working with patches.
Table of Contents
When you find a package that is not yet in pkgsrc, you most likely have a URL from where you can download the source code. Starting with this URL, creating a package involves only a few steps.
In your mk.conf, set PKG_DEVELOPER=yes to
enable the basic quality checks.
Install the package meta-pkgs/pkg_developer, which among others will
install the utilities url2pkg,
pkglint, pkgvi and
mkpatches:
$cd /usr/pkgsrc$(cd meta-pkgs/pkg_developer && bmake update)
Choose one of the top-level directories as the category in
which you want to place your package. You can also create a directory of
your own (maybe called local). Change into that
category directory:
$cdcategory
Run the program url2pkg, passing as
argument the URL of the distribution file (in most cases a
.tar.gz file). This will download the distribution
file and create the necessary files of the package, based on what's in
the distribution file:
$url2pkghttps://www.example.org/packages/package-1.0.tar.gz
Examine the extracted files to determine the dependencies of
your package. Ideally, this is mentioned in some
README file, but things may differ. For each of
these dependencies, look where it exists in pkgsrc, and if there is a
file called buildlink3.mk in that directory, add a
line to your package Makefile which includes that
file just before the last line. If the
buildlink3.mk file does not exist, it must be
created first. The buildlink3.mk file makes sure
that the package's include files and libraries are provided.
If you just need binaries from a dependent package, add a
DEPENDS line to the Makefile, which specifies the
version of the dependency and where it can be found in pkgsrc. This line
should be placed in the third paragraph. If the dependency is only
needed for building the package, but not when using it, use
TOOL_DEPENDS or BUILD_DEPENDS
instead of DEPENDS.
The difference between TOOL_DEPENDS and
BUILD_DEPENDS occurs when cross-compiling:
TOOL_DEPENDS are native
packages, i.e. packages for the platform where the package is built;
BUILD_DEPENDS are target
packages, i.e. packages for the platform for which the package
is built. There is also TEST_DEPENDS, which
specifies a dependency used only for testing the resulting package
built, using the upstream project's included test suite, on the native
platform.
Your package may then look like this:
[...] TOOL_DEPENDS+= libxslt-[0-9]*:../../textproc/libxslt DEPENDS+= screen-[0-9]*:../../misc/screen DEPENDS+= screen>=4.0:../../misc/screen [...] .include "../../category/package/buildlink3.mk" .include "../../devel/glib2/buildlink3.mk" .include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
Run pkglint to see what things still need to be done to make your package a “good” one. If you don't know what pkglint's warnings want to tell you, try pkglint --explain or pkglint -e, which outputs additional explanations.
In many cases the package is not yet ready to build. You can find instructions for the most common cases in the next section, Section 14.1, “Common types of packages”. After you have followed the instructions over there, you can hopefully continue here.
Run bmake clean to clean the working
directory from the extracted files. Besides these files, a lot of cache
files and other system information have been saved in the working
directory, which may have become outdated after you edited the
Makefile.
Now, run bmake to build the package. For the various things that can go wrong in this phase, consult Chapter 21, Making your package work.
If the extracted files from the package need to be fixed, run multiple rounds of these commands:
$bmake$pkgvi ${WRKSRC}/some/file/that/does/not/compile$mkpatches$bmake mps$bmake clean
When the package builds fine, the next step is to install the package. Run bmake install and hope that everything works.
Up to now, the file PLIST, which
contains a list of the files that are installed by the package, is
nearly empty. Run bmake print-PLIST
>PLIST to generate a probably correct list. Check
the file using your preferred text editor to see if the list of
files looks plausible.
Run pkglint again to see if the generated
PLIST contains garbage or not.
When you ran bmake install, the package
had been registered in the database of installed files, but with an
empty list of files. To fix this, run bmake deinstall
and bmake install again. Now the package is
registered with the list of files from
PLIST.
Run bmake clean update to run everything from above again in a single step, making sure that the PLIST is correct and the whole package is created as intended.
Run pkglint to see if there's anything left to do.
Commit the package to pkgsrc-wip or main pkgsrc; see Chapter 23, Submitting and Committing.
Python modules and programs packages are easily created using a set of predefined variables.
If some Python versions are not supported by the software, set the
PYTHON_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE variable to the Python versions
that are not supported, e.g.
PYTHON_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE= 27
If the packaged software is a Python module, include
../../lang/python/wheel.mk.  Note per PEP-518,
the minimum and default requirement to create .whl files is devel/py-setuptools; however, there are various
other possible tools that projects can use. Thus inclusion of
wheel.mk does not imply these defaults are
defined as TOOL_DEPENDS. Whatever the project
specifically requires as packaging tools must be defined in the
package Makefile.
The package directory should be called
“py-software” and PKGNAME should be set to
“${PYPKGPREFIX}-${DISTNAME}”, e.g.
DISTNAME=   foopymodule-1.2.10
PKGNAME=    ${PYPKGPREFIX}-${DISTNAME}
For software in PyPi, the name should match what PyPi specifies for "pip install software".
If it is an application, include
“../../lang/python/application.mk”.
In order to correctly set the path to the Python interpreter, use the
REPLACE_PYTHON variable and set it to the list of files
(paths relative to WRKSRC) that must be corrected.
For example:
REPLACE_PYTHON= *.py
Simple R packages from CRAN
are handled automatically by R2pkg, which is
available in pkgtools/R2pkg.
Individual packages (and optionally their dependencies) may be created
and updated.  R packages generally follow the same form, and most of
the relevant information needed is contained in a
DESCRIPTION file as part of each R package on
CRAN.
Consequently, R2pkg downloads that information and
creates or updates a package in the canonical form.  The resulting
package should be reviewed for correctness.
TeXlive packages from CTAN are handled automatically by
texlive2pkg, which is available in pkgtools/texlive2pkg.
If the TeXlive package name is not known, it may be useful to search CTAN. A “Contained in” field on the package page typically identifies the basename of the package file in the TeXlive archive.
If the TeXlive package name is known, download the files from
the TeXlive
archive.  For package foo, you will need
to download foo.tar.xz.  Most TeXlive packages
also have associated documentation packages, so download
foo.doc.tar.xz at the same time.  These files
should be placed in the appropriate category directory, which is often
but not always print.  Then run the following
command in the category directory.
texlive2pkg foo.tar.xz foo.doc.tar.xz
This will create two packages, tex-foo and
tex-foo-doc.  Be sure to check that both packages
are correct.
Finally, CTAN currently does not include version information in package filenames and changes their contents periodically when updates occur. Consequently, pkgsrc avoids downloading distfiles directly from CTAN and instead relies on the pkgsrc archives. For each new or updated TeXlive package, e.g., the main one and the corresponding documentation, upload the distfiles with the following command in each package directory.
make upload-distfiles
Looking at the file pkgsrc/doc/TODO, I saw
that the “nvu” package has not yet been imported into
pkgsrc. As the description says it has to do with the web, the obvious
choice for the category is “www”.
$mkdir www/nvu$cd www/nvu
The web site says that the sources are available as a tar file, so I fed that URL to the url2pkg program:
$ url2pkg http://cvs.nvu.com/download/nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
My editor popped up, and I added a PKGNAME line
below the DISTNAME line, as the package name should
not have the word “sources” in it. I also filled in the
MAINTAINER, HOMEPAGE and
COMMENT fields. Then the package
Makefile looked like that:
# $NetBSD $ # DISTNAME= nvu-1.0-sources PKGNAME= nvu-1.0 CATEGORIES= www MASTER_SITES= http://cvs.nvu.com/download/ EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.bz2 MAINTAINER= rillig@NetBSD.org HOMEPAGE= http://cvs.nvu.com/ COMMENT= Web Authoring System # url2pkg-marker (please do not remove this line.) .include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
On the first line of output above, an artificial space has been added between NetBSD and $, this is a workaround to prevent CVS expanding to the filename of the guide.
Then, I quit the editor and watched pkgsrc downloading a large source archive:
url2pkg> Running "make makesum" ... => Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found => Fetching nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2 Requesting http://cvs.nvu.com/download/nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2 100% |*************************************| 28992 KB 150.77 KB/s00:00 ETA 29687976 bytes retrieved in 03:12 (150.77 KB/s) url2pkg> Running "make extract" ... => Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found => Checksum SHA1 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2 => Checksum RMD160 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2 work.bacc -> /tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc ===> Installing dependencies for nvu-1.0 ===> Overriding tools for nvu-1.0 ===> Extracting for nvu-1.0 url2pkg> Adjusting the Makefile. Remember to correct CATEGORIES, HOMEPAGE, COMMENT, and DESCR when you're done! Good luck! (See pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt for some more help :-)
Now that the package has been extracted, let's see what's inside
it. The package has a README.txt, but that only
says something about mozilla, so it's probably useless for seeing what
dependencies this package has. But since there is a GNU configure script
in the package, let's hope that it will complain about everything it
needs.
$ bmake
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
=> Checksum SHA1 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
=> Checksum RMD160 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
===> Patching for nvu-1.0
===> Creating toolchain wrappers for nvu-1.0
===> Configuring for nvu-1.0
[...]
configure: error: Perl 5.004 or higher is required.
[...]
WARNING: Please add USE_TOOLS+=perl to the package Makefile.
[...]
That worked quite well. So I opened the package Makefile in my
editor, and since it already has a USE_TOOLS line, I
just appended “perl” to it. Since the dependencies of the
package have changed now, and since a perl wrapper is automatically
installed in the “tools” phase, I need to build the package
from scratch.
$bmake clean ===> Cleaning for nvu-1.0$bmake [...] *** /tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc/.tools/bin/make is not \ GNU Make. You will not be able to build Mozilla without GNU Make. [...]
So I added “gmake” to the
USE_TOOLS line and tried again (from scratch).
[...] checking for GTK - version >= 1.2.0... no *** Could not run GTK test program, checking why... [...]
Now to the other dependencies. The first question is: Where is the GTK package hidden in pkgsrc?
$echo ../../*/gtk* [many packages ...]$echo ../../*/gtk ../../x11/gtk$echo ../../*/gtk2 ../../x11/gtk2$echo ../../*/gtk2/bui* ../../x11/gtk2/buildlink3.mk
The first try was definitely too broad. The second one had exactly one result, which is very good. But there is one pitfall with GNOME packages. Before GNOME 2 had been released, there were already many GNOME 1 packages in pkgsrc. To be able to continue to use these packages, the GNOME 2 packages were imported as separate packages, and their names usually have a “2” appended. So I checked whether this was the case here, and indeed it was.
Since the GTK2 package has a buildlink3.mk
file, adding the dependency is very easy. I just inserted an
.include line before the last line of the package
Makefile, so that it now looks like this:
[...] .include "../../x11/gtk2/buildlink3.mk" .include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk
After another bmake clean && bmake, the answer was:
[...] checking for gtk-config... /home/roland/pkg/bin/gtk-config checking for GTK - version >= 1.2.0... no *** Could not run GTK test program, checking why... *** The test program failed to compile or link. See the file config.log for the *** exact error that occured. This usually means GTK was incorrectly installed *** or that you have moved GTK since it was installed. In the latter case, you *** may want to edit the gtk-config script: /home/roland/pkg/bin/gtk-config configure: error: Test for GTK failed. [...]
In this particular case, the assumption that “every package
prefers GNOME 2” had been wrong. The first of the lines above
told me that this package really wanted to have the GNOME 1 version of
GTK. If the package had looked for GTK2, it would have looked for
pkg-config instead of gtk-config.
So I changed the x11/gtk2 to
x11/gtk in the package Makefile,
and tried again.
[...] cc -o xpidl.o -c -DOSTYPE=\"NetBSD3\" -DOSARCH=\"NetBSD\" [...] In file included from xpidl.c:42: xpidl.h:53:24: libIDL/IDL.h: No such file or directory In file included from xpidl.c:42: xpidl.h:132: error: parse error before "IDL_ns" [...]
The package still does not find all of its dependencies. Now the
question is: Which package provides the
libIDL/IDL.h header file?
$echo ../../*/*idl* ../../devel/py-idle ../../wip/idled ../../x11/acidlaunch$echo ../../*/*IDL* ../../net/libIDL
Let's take the one from the second try. So I included the
../../net/libIDL/buildlink3.mk file and tried
again. But the error didn't change. After digging through some of the
code, I concluded that the build process of the package was broken and
couldn't have ever worked, but since the Mozilla source tree is quite
large, I didn't want to fix it. So I added the following to the package
Makefile and tried again:
CPPFLAGS+=              -I${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.libIDL}/include/libIDL-2.0
BUILDLINK_TRANSFORM+=   l:IDL:IDL-2
The latter line is needed because the package expects the library
libIDL.so, but only
libIDL-2.so is available. So I told the compiler
wrapper to rewrite that on the fly.
The next problem was related to a recent change of the FreeType
interface. I looked up in www/seamonkey
which patch files were relevant for this issue and copied them to the
patches directory. Then I retried, fixed the
patches so that they applied cleanly and retried again. This time,
everything worked.
Table of Contents
Pkgsrc consists of many Makefile fragments,
  each of which forms a well-defined part of the pkgsrc system. Using
  the make(1) system as a programming language for a big system
  like pkgsrc requires some discipline to keep the code correct and
  understandable.
The basic ingredients for Makefile
  programming are variables and shell
  commands. Among these shell commands may even be more complex ones
  like awk(1) programs. To make sure that every shell command runs
  as intended it is necessary to quote all variables correctly when they
  are used.
This chapter describes some patterns that appear quite often in
  Makefiles, including the pitfalls that come along
  with them.
When you are creating a file as a target of a rule, always write the data to a temporary file first and finally rename that file. Otherwise there might occur an error in the middle of generating the file, and when the user runs make(1) for the second time, the file exists and will not be regenerated properly. Example:
wrong:
        @echo "line 1" > ${.TARGET}
        @echo "line 2" >> ${.TARGET}
        @false
correct:
        @echo "line 1" > ${.TARGET}.tmp
        @echo "line 2" >> ${.TARGET}.tmp
        @false
        @mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
When you run make wrong twice, the file
    wrong will exist, although there was an error
    message in the first run. On the other hand, running make
    correct gives an error message twice, as expected.
You might remember that make(1) sometimes removes
    ${.TARGET} in case of error, but this only
    happens when it is interrupted, for example by pressing
    Ctrl+C. This does not happen
    when one of the commands fails (like false(1) above).
Makefile variables contain strings that
    can be processed using the five operators =,
    +=, ?=, := and
    !=, which are described in the make(1) man
    page.
When a variable's value is parsed from a
    Makefile, the hash character # and
    the backslash character \ are handled specially. If a
    backslash is the last character in a line, that backslash is removed
    from the line and the line continues with the next line of the file.
The # character starts a comment that reaches
    until the end of the line. To get an actual # character,
    such as in a URL, write \# instead.
The evaluation of variables either happens immediately or lazy.
    It happens immediately when the variable occurs on the right-hand
    side of the := or the != operator, in a
    .if condition or a .for loop.
    In the other cases, it is evaluated lazily.
Some of the modifiers split the string into words and then operate on the words, others operate on the string as a whole. When a string is split into words, double quotes and single quotes are interpreted as delimiters, just like in sh(1).
All variable names starting with an underscore are reserved for use by the pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall not be used by packages.
In .for loops you should use lowercase variable names for the iteration variables.
All list variables should have a plural name,
	such as PKG_OPTIONS or
	DISTFILES.
When adding a string that possibly contains whitespace or quotes to
a list (example 1), it must be quoted using the :Q
modifier.
When adding another list to a list (example 2), it must not be quoted, since its elements are already quoted.
STRING=         foo * bar `date`
LIST=           # empty
ANOTHER_LIST=   a=b c=d
LIST+=          ${STRING:Q}       # 1
LIST+=          ${ANOTHER_LIST}   # 2
Echoing a string containing special characters needs special work.
STRING=         foo bar <    > * `date` $$HOME ' "
EXAMPLE_ENV=    string=${STRING:Q} x=multiple\ quoted\ words
all:
        echo ${STRING}                  # 1
        echo ${STRING:Q}                # 2
        printf '%s\n' ${STRING:Q}''     # 3
        env ${EXAMPLE_ENV} sh -c 'echo "$$string"; echo "$$x"'   # 4
Example 1 leads to a syntax error in the shell, as the characters are just copied.
Example 2 quotes the string so that the shell interprets it correctly. But the echo command may additionally interpret strings with a leading dash or those containing backslashes.
Example 3 can handle arbitrary strings, since printf(1) only interprets the format string, but not the next argument. The trailing single quotes handle the case when the string is empty. In that case, the :Q modifier would result in an empty string too, which would then be skipped by the shell. For printf(1) this doesn't make a difference, but other programs may care.
In example 4, the EXAMPLE_ENV does not
need to be quoted because the quoting has already been done
when adding elements to the list.
When passing CFLAGS or similar variables to a
GNU-style configure script (especially those that call other configure
scripts), it must not have leading or trailing whitespace, since
otherwise the configure script gets confused. To trim leading and
trailing whitespace, use the :M modifier, as in the
following example:
CPPFLAGS=               # empty
CPPFLAGS+=              -Wundef -DPREFIX=\"${PREFIX}\"
CPPFLAGS+=              ${MY_CPPFLAGS}
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        CPPFLAGS=${CPPFLAGS:M*:Q}
all:
        echo x${CPPFLAGS:Q}x            # leading and trailing whitespace
        echo x${CONFIGURE_ARGS:Q}x      # properly trimmed
In this example, CPPFLAGS has both leading and
trailing whitespace because the += operator always adds a
space.
When a possibly empty variable is used in a shell program, it may lead to a syntax error.
EGFILES=        # empty
install-examples:   # produces a syntax error in the shell
        for egfile in ${EGFILES}; do            \
                echo "Installing $$egfile";     \
        done
The shell only sees the text for egfile in ; do, since
${EGFILES} is replaced with an empty string by make(1).
To fix this syntax error, use one of the snippets below.
EGFILES=        # empty
install-examples:
        for egfile in ${EGFILES} ""; do         \
                [ -n "$$egfile" ] || continue;  \
                echo "Installing $$egfile";     \
        done
In this case, an empty string is appended to the iteration list (to prevent the syntax error) and filtered out later.
EGFILES=        # empty
install-examples:
.for egfile in ${EGFILES}
        echo "Installing ${egfile}"
.endfor
If one of the filenames contains special characters, it should be enclosed in single or double quotes.
To have a shell command test whether a make variable is empty, use
the following code: ${TEST} -z ${POSSIBLY_EMPTY:Q}"".
When a variable can have the values yes or
no, use the following pattern to test the variable:
.if ${VAR:U:tl} == "yes"
# do something
.endif
The :U modifier is only necessary if the variable
can be undefined. If the variable is guaranteed to be defined, the
:U can be omitted.
The :tl modifier converts the variable value to
lowercase, allowing for the values yes,
Yes, YES.
Table of Contents
Many packages have the ability to be built to support different
sets of features.  bsd.options.mk is a framework
in pkgsrc that provides generic handling of those options that
determine different ways in which the packages can be built.  It's
possible for the user to specify exactly which sets of options will be
built into a package or to allow a set of global default options
apply.
There are two broad classes of behaviors that one might want to control via options. One is whether some particular feature is enabled in a program that will be built anyway, often by including or not including a dependency on some other package. The other is whether or not an additional program will be built as part of the package. Generally, it is better to make a split package for such additional programs instead of using options, because it enables binary packages to be built which can then be added separately. For example, the foo package might have minimal dependencies (those packages without which foo doesn't make sense), and then the foo-gfoo package might include the GTK frontend program gfoo. This is better than including a gtk option to foo that adds gfoo, because either that option is default, in which case binary users can't get foo without gfoo, or not default, in which case they can't get gfoo. With split packages, they can install foo without having GTK, and later decide to install gfoo (pulling in GTK at that time). This is an advantage to source users too, avoiding the need for rebuilds.
Plugins with widely varying dependencies should usually be split instead of options.
It is often more work to maintain split packages, especially if the upstream package does not support this. The decision of split vs. option should be made based on the likelihood that users will want or object to the various pieces, the size of the dependencies that are included, and the amount of work.
A further consideration is licensing. Non-free parts, or parts that depend on non-free dependencies (especially plugins) should almost always be split if feasible.
Global default options are listed in
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which is a list of the options
that should be built into every package if that option is supported.
This variable should be set in mk.conf.
The following example shows how
bsd.options.mk should be used
by the hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package
Makefile, or in a file,
e.g. options.mk, that is included by the
main package Makefile.
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR=                PKG_OPTIONS.wibble
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS=          wibble-foo ldap
PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS=    database
PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.database=     mysql pgsql
PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS=          wibble-foo
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS+=       WIBBLE_USE_OPENLDAP:ldap
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS+=       foo:wibble-foo
.include "../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk"
# this package was previously named wibble2
.if defined(PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2)
PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS+=            ${PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2}
PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS+= \
        "Deprecated variable PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2 used, use ${PKG_OPTIONS_VAR} instead."
.endif
.include "../../mk/bsd.options.mk"
# Package-specific option-handling
###
### FOO support
###
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mwibble-foo)
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=    --enable-foo
.endif
###
### LDAP support
###
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
.  include "../../databases/openldap-client/buildlink3.mk"
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=    --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap-client}
.endif
###
### database support
###
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mmysql)
.  include "../../mk/mysql.buildlink3.mk"
.endif
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mpgsql)
.  include "../../mk/pgsql.buildlink3.mk"
.endif
The first section contains the information about which build options are supported by the package, and any default options settings if needed.
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is the name of the
make(1) variable that the user can set to override the default
options.  It should be set to
PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase. Do not set it to
PKG_OPTIONS.${PKGBASE}, since PKGBASE is not defined
at the point where the options are processed.
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS is a list of
build options supported by the package.
PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS is a
list of names of groups of mutually exclusive options.  The options in
each group are listed in
PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP..
The most specific setting of any option from the group takes
precedence over all other options in the group.  Options from the
groups will be automatically added to
groupnamePKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS.
PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS is like
PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, but building the
packages will fail if no option from the group is
selected.
PKG_OPTIONS_NONEMPTY_SETS is a list
of names of sets of options.  At least one option from each set must
be selected.  The options in each set are listed in
PKG_OPTIONS_SET..
Options from the sets will be automatically added to
setnamePKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS.  Building the package will
fail if no option from the set is selected.
PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS is a list of
build options which are enabled by default.
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS is a list
of
“USE_VARIABLE:option”
pairs that map legacy mk.conf variables to
their option counterparts.  Pairs should be added with
“+=” to keep the listing of global legacy variables.  A
warning will be issued if the user uses a legacy
variable.
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS is a list
of
“old-option:new-option”
pairs that map options that have been renamed to their new
counterparts.  Pairs should be added with “+=” to keep
the listing of global legacy options.  A warning will be issued if
the user uses a legacy option.
PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS is a list of
options implied by deprecated variables used.  This can be used for
cases that neither PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS nor
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS can handle, e. g. when
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is renamed.
PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS is
a list of warnings about deprecated variables or options used, and
what to use instead.
A package should never modify
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS or the variable named in
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR.  These are strictly user-settable.
To suggest a default set of options, use
PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS.
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR must be defined before
including bsd.options.mk.  If none of
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS,
PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, and
PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS are defined (as can
happen with platform-specific options if none of them is supported on
the current platform), PKG_OPTIONS is set to the
empty list and the package is otherwise treated as not using the
options framework.
After the inclusion of bsd.options.mk, the
variable PKG_OPTIONS contains the list of selected
build options, properly filtered to remove unsupported and duplicate
options.
The remaining sections contain the logic that is specific to
each option.  The correct way to check for an option is to check
whether it is listed in PKG_OPTIONS:
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Moption)
Options that enable similar features in different packages (like optional support for a library) should use a common name in all packages that support it (like the name of the library). If another package already has an option with the same meaning, use the same name.
Options that enable features specific to one package, where it's
unlikely that another (unrelated) package has the same (or a similar)
optional feature, should use a name prefixed with
pkgname-
If a group of related packages share an optional feature
specific to that group, prefix it with the name of the
“main” package
(e. g. djbware-errno-hack).
For new options, add a line to
mk/defaults/options.description.  Lines have two
fields, separated by tab.  The first field is the option name, the
second its description.  The description should be a whole sentence
(starting with an uppercase letter and ending with a period) that
describes what enabling the option does.  E. g. “Enable ispell
support.” The file is sorted by option names.
When writing buildlink3.mk files, it is often necessary to list
different dependencies based on the options with which the package was
built. For querying these options, the file
pkgsrc/mk/pkg-build-options.mk should be used. A
typical example looks like this:
pkgbase := libpurple .include "../../mk/pkg-build-options.mk" .if !empty(PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS.libpurple:Mdbus) ... .endif
Including pkg-build-options.mk here will set
the variable PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS.libpurple to the build
options of the libpurple package, which can then be queried like
PKG_OPTIONS in the options.mk
file. See the file pkg-build-options.mk for more
details.
Table of Contents
The USE_TOOLS definition is used both internally
by pkgsrc and also for individual packages to define what commands
are needed for building a package (like TOOL_DEPENDS)
or for later run-time of an installed packaged (such as
DEPENDS).
If the native system provides an adequate tool, then in many cases, a pkgsrc
package will not be used.
When building a package, the replacement tools are made available in a directory (as symlinks or wrapper scripts) that is early in the executable search path. Just like the buildlink system, this helps with consistent builds.
A tool may be needed to help build a specific package. For example, perl, GNU make (gmake) or yacc may be needed.
Also a tool may be needed, for example, because the native system's supplied tool may be inefficient for building a package with pkgsrc. For example, a package may need GNU awk, bison (instead of yacc) or a better sed.
The tools used by a package can be listed by running make show-tools.
The default set of tools used by pkgsrc is defined in
bsd.pkg.mk. This includes standard Unix tools,
such as: cat, awk,
chmod, test, and so on.
These can be seen by running:
make show-var VARNAME=USE_TOOLS.
If a package needs a specific program to build
then the USE_TOOLS variable can be used
to define the tools needed.
In the following examples, the :run means that it is needed at run-time (and becomes a DEPENDS). The default is a build dependency which can be set with :build. (So in this example, it is the same as gmake:build and pkg-config:build.)
USE_TOOLS+= gmake perl:run pkg-config
When using the tools framework, a
TOOLS_PATH.foo variable is defined
which contains the full path to the appropriate tool. For example,
TOOLS_PATH.bash could be “/bin/bash”
on Linux systems.
If you always need a pkgsrc version of the
tool at run-time, then just use DEPENDS instead.
When improving or porting pkgsrc to a new platform, have a look
at (or create) the corresponding platform specific make file fragment under
pkgsrc/mk/tools/tools.${OPSYS}.mk which defines
the name of the common tools. For example:
.if exists(/usr/bin/bzcat) TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzcat .elif exists(/usr/bin/bzip2) TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzip2 -cd .endif TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
Table of Contents
Buildlink is a framework in pkgsrc that controls what headers and libraries are seen by a package's configure and build processes. This is implemented in a two step process:
Symlink headers and libraries for dependencies into
      BUILDLINK_DIR, which by default is a subdirectory
      of WRKDIR.
Create wrapper scripts that are used in place of the normal compiler
      tools that translate -I${LOCALBASE}/include and
      -L${LOCALBASE}/lib into references to
      BUILDLINK_DIR. The wrapper scripts also make
      native compiler on some operating systems look like GCC, so that
      packages that expect GCC won't require modifications to build with
      those native compilers.
This normalizes the environment in which a package is built so that the
  package may be built consistently despite what other software may be
  installed. Please note that the normal system header and library paths,
  e.g. /usr/include,
  /usr/lib, etc., are always searched -- buildlink3 is
  designed to insulate the package build from non-system-supplied
  software.
The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3 framework (“bl3ifying”) is fairly straightforward. The things to keep in mind are:
Ensure that the build always calls the wrapper scripts
	instead of the actual toolchain.  Some packages are tricky,
	and the only way to know for sure is the check
	${WRKDIR}/.work.log to see if the
	wrappers are being invoked.
Don't override PREFIX from within
	the package Makefile, e.g. Java VMs, standalone shells,
	etc., because the code to symlink files into
	${BUILDLINK_DIR} looks for files
	relative to “pkg_info -qp pkgname”.
	
Remember that only the
	buildlink3.mk files that you list in a
	package's Makefile are added as dependencies for that package.
	
If a dependency on a particular package is required for its libraries and headers, then we replace:
DEPENDS+= foo>=1.1.0:../../category/foo
with
.include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
The buildlink3.mk files usually define the required dependencies. If you need a newer version of the dependency when using buildlink3.mk files, then you can define it in your Makefile; for example:
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.foo+= foo>=1.1.0 .include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
There are several buildlink3.mk
    files in pkgsrc/mk
    that handle special package issues:
bdb.buildlink3.mk chooses either
	the native or a pkgsrc Berkeley DB implementation based on
	the values of BDB_ACCEPTED and
	BDB_DEFAULT.
curses.buildlink3.mk: If the system
	comes with neither Curses nor NCurses, this will take care
	to install the devel/ncurses package.
krb5.buildlink3.mk uses the value
	of KRB5_ACCEPTED to choose between
	adding a dependency on Heimdal or MIT-krb5 for packages that
	require a Kerberos 5 implementation.
motif.buildlink3.mk checks for a
	system-provided Motif installation or adds a dependency on
	x11/lesstif or x11/motif. The user can set
	MOTIF_TYPE to “dt”,
	“lesstif” or “motif”
	to choose which Motif version will be used.
readline.buildlink3.mk checks for a
	system-provided GNU readline or editline (libedit) installation,
	or adds a dependency on devel/readline,
	devel/editline. The user can set
	READLINE_DEFAULT to choose readline implementation.
	If your package really needs GNU readline library, its Makefile
	should include devel/readline/buildlink3.mk
	instead of readline.buildlink3.mk.
oss.buildlink3.mk defines several
	variables that may be used by packages that use the
	Open Sound System (OSS) API.
pgsql.buildlink3.mk will accept
	any of the Postgres versions in the variable
	PGSQL_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED and default to
	the version PGSQL_VERSION_DEFAULT. See
	the file for more information.
pthread.buildlink3.mk uses the value of
	PTHREAD_OPTS and checks for native pthreads or adds
	a dependency on devel/pth as needed.
xaw.buildlink3.mk uses the value of
	XAW_TYPE to choose a particular Athena widgets
	library.
The comments in those buildlink3.mk
    files provide a more complete
    description of how to use them properly.
A package's buildlink3.mk file is
    included by Makefiles to indicate the need to compile and link
    against header files and libraries provided by the package.  A
    buildlink3.mk file should always provide
    enough information to add the correct type of dependency
    relationship and include any other
    buildlink3.mk files that it needs to find
    headers and libraries that it needs in turn.
To generate an initial buildlink3.mk
    file for further editing, Rene Hexel's pkgtools/createbuildlink
    package is highly recommended.  For most packages, the following
    command will generate a good starting point for
    buildlink3.mk files:
%cd pkgsrc/category/pkgdir%createbuildlink >buildlink3.mk
The following real-life example
      buildlink3.mk is taken
      from pkgsrc/graphics/tiff:
BUILDLINK_TREE+= tiff .if !defined(TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK) TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:= BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.tiff+= tiff>=3.6.1 BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.tiff+= tiff>=3.7.2nb1 BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.tiff?= ../../graphics/tiff .include "../../devel/zlib/buildlink3.mk" .include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk" .endif # TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK BUILDLINK_TREE+= -tiff
The header and footer manipulate
      BUILDLINK_TREE, which is common across all
      buildlink3.mk files and is used to track
      the dependency tree.
The main section is protected from multiple inclusion
      and controls how the dependency on pkg is
      added.  Several important variables are set in the section:
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.
	  is the dependency version recorded in the installed
	  package; this should always be set using
	  += to ensure that
	  we're appending to any pre-existing list of values.  This
	  variable should be set to the last version of the
	  package that had an backwards-incompatible API change.
	  pkg
BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.
	  is the location of the pkgpkg
	  pkgsrc directory.
BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.
	  (not shown above) controls whether we use
	  pkgBUILD_DEPENDS or
	  DEPENDS to add the dependency on
	  pkg.  The build dependency is
	  selected by setting
	  BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.
	  to “build”.  By default, the full dependency is
	  used.pkg
BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.
	    and
	    pkgBUILDLINK_LIBDIRS.
	    (not shown above) are lists of subdirectories of
	    pkg${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.
	    to add to the header and library search paths.  These
	    default to “include” and “lib”
	  respectively.pkg}
BUILDLINK_CPPFLAGS.
	    (not shown above) is the list of preprocessor flags to add
	    to pkgCPPFLAGS, which are passed on to the
	    configure and build phases.  The “-I” option
	    should be avoided and instead be handled using
	    BUILDLINK_INCDIRS. as
	  above.pkg
The following variables are all optionally defined within
      this second section (protected against multiple inclusion) and
      control which package files are symlinked into
      ${BUILDLINK_DIR} and how their names are
      transformed during the symlinking:
BUILDLINK_FILES.
	    (not shown above) is a shell glob pattern relative to
	    pkg${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.
	    to be symlinked into
	    pkg}${BUILDLINK_DIR},
	  e.g. include/*.h.
BUILDLINK_FILES_CMD.
	    (not shown above) is a shell pipeline that
	    outputs to stdout a list of files relative to
	    pkg${BUILDLINK_PREFIX..
	    The resulting files are to be symlinked
	    into pkg}${BUILDLINK_DIR}.  By default,
	    this takes the +CONTENTS of a
	    pkg and filters it through
	    ${BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER..pkg}
BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.
	    (not shown above) is a filter command that filters
	    pkg+CONTENTS input into a list of files
	    relative to
	    ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.
	    on stdout.  By default,
	    pkg}BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.
	    outputs the contents of the pkginclude
	    and lib directories in the package
	    +CONTENTS.
BUILDLINK_FNAME_TRANSFORM.
	    (not shown above) is a list of sed arguments used to
	    transform the name of the source filename into a
	    destination filename, e.g. -e
	    "s|/curses.h|/ncurses.h|g".pkg
This section can additionally include any
      buildlink3.mk needed for
      pkg's library dependencies.
      Including these buildlink3.mk files
      means that the headers and libraries for these
      dependencies are also symlinked into
      ${BUILDLINK_DIR}
      whenever the pkg
      buildlink3.mk
      file is included. Dependencies are only added for directly
      include buildlink3.mk files.
When providing a buildlink3.mk and
      including other buildlink3.mk files in it,
      please only add necessary ones, i.e., those whose libraries or
      header files are automatically exposed when the package is
      use.
In particular, if only an executable
      (bin/foo) is linked against a library, that
      library does not need to be propagated in the
      buildlink3.mk file.
The following steps should help you decide if a
      buildlink3.mk file needs to be included:
      
Look at the installed header files: What headers do they include? The packages providing these files must be buildlinked.
Run ldd on all installed
	libraries and look against what other libraries they link.
	Some of the packages providing these probably need to be
	buildlinked; however, it's not automatic, since e.g. GTK on
	some systems pulls in the X libraries, so they will show up in
	the ldd output, while on others (like OS
	X) it won't. ldd output can thus only be
	used as a hint.
Both variables set lower bounds for a version of this package. The two variables differ in that one describes source compatibility (API) and the other binary compatibility (ABI). The difference is that a change in the API breaks compilation of programs while changes in the ABI stop compiled programs from running.
The
      BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.
      variable in a pkgbuildlink3.mk should be
      changed very rarely.  (One possible scenario: If all packages
      using this package need a higher version than defined in the
      buildlink3.mk,
      BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.
      could be updated to that higher version.)pkg
On the other hand, changes to
      BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.
      are more common.  The variable will need to be updated every
      time the major version of one of its shared libraries is changed,
      or any other change where a binary built against the previous
      version of the package will not run against the new version any
      longer.pkg
In such a case, the package's
      BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.
      must be increased to require the new package version.  Then the
      pkgPKGREVISION of all packages
      foo that depend on this package need
      to be increased, and if they have
      buildlink3.mk files,
      BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.
      in their foobuildlink3.mk files must be
      increased to the new version as well. This is required so that a
      package will pull in the versions of the packages that use the
      new ABI and that the packages' PKGREVISIONs
      uniquely identify the packages built against the new ABI. The
      pkgtools/revbump package can
      help with these updates.
See Section 21.1.5, “Handling dependencies” for more information
      about dependencies on other packages, including the
      BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS definitions.
Please take careful consideration before adjusting
      BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.
      or
      pkgBUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.
      in a pkgbuildlink3.mk file as we don't want to
      cause unneeded package deletions and rebuilds.  In many cases,
      new versions of packages work just fine with older
      dependencies.
Also, it is not needed to set
      BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.
      when it is identical to
      pkgBUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS..pkg
Note there is also the distinction that users are able to disable
      enforcement of ABI dependencies using the USE_ABI_DEPENDS
      variable, but there is no equivalent option for API dependencies.
Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that
      coincide with headers and libraries present in the base system.
      Aside from a buildlink3.mk file, these
      packages should also include a builtin.mk
      file that includes the necessary checks to decide whether using
      the built-in software or the pkgsrc software is
    appropriate.
The only requirements of a builtin.mk file for
    pkg are:
It should set
	USE_BUILTIN.
	to either “yes” or “no”
	after it is included.pkg
It should not override any
	USE_BUILTIN.
	which is already set before the
	pkgbuiltin.mk file is included.
It should be written to allow multiple inclusion.  This
	is very important and takes careful
	attention to Makefile coding.
The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk files:
.if !defined(IS_BUILTIN.foo)
#
# IS_BUILTIN.foo is set to "yes" or "no" depending on whether "foo"
# genuinely exists in the system or not.
#
IS_BUILTIN.foo?=        no
# BUILTIN_PKG.foo should be set here if "foo" is built-in and its package
# version can be determined.
#
.  if !empty(IS_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
BUILTIN_PKG.foo?=       foo-1.0
.  endif
.endif  # IS_BUILTIN.foo
.if !defined(USE_BUILTIN.foo)
USE_BUILTIN.foo?=       ${IS_BUILTIN.foo}
.  if defined(BUILTIN_PKG.foo)
.    for _depend_ in ${BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.foo}
.      if !empty(USE_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
USE_BUILTIN.foo!=                                                       \
        ${PKG_ADMIN} pmatch '${_depend_}' ${BUILTIN_PKG.foo}            \
        && ${ECHO} "yes" || ${ECHO} "no"
.      endif
.    endfor
.  endif
.endif  # USE_BUILTIN.foo
CHECK_BUILTIN.foo?=     no
.if !empty(CHECK_BUILTIN.foo:M[nN][oO])
#
# Here we place code that depends on whether USE_BUILTIN.foo is set to
# "yes" or "no".
#
.endif  # CHECK_BUILTIN.foo
The first section sets
      IS_BUILTIN.
      depending on if pkgpkg really exists
      in the base system.  This should not be a base system software
      with similar functionality to pkg;
      it should only be “yes” if the actual package is
      included as part of the base system.  This variable is only
      used internally within the builtin.mk
      file.
The second section sets
      BUILTIN_PKG.
      to the version of pkgpkg in the base
      system if it exists (if
      IS_BUILTIN.
      is “yes”).  This variable is only used internally
      within the pkgbuiltin.mk file.
The third section sets
      USE_BUILTIN.
      and is required in all
      pkgbuiltin.mk files.  The code in this
      section must make the determination whether the built-in
      software is adequate to satisfy the dependencies listed in
      BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS..
      This is typically done by comparing
      pkgBUILTIN_PKG.
      against each of the dependencies in
      pkgBUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS..
      pkgUSE_BUILTIN.
      must be set to the correct value by the
      end of the pkgbuiltin.mk file.  Note that
      USE_BUILTIN.
      may be “yes” even if
      pkgIS_BUILTIN.
      is “no” because we may make the determination
      that the built-in version of the software is similar enough to
      be used as a replacement.pkg
The last section is guarded by
      CHECK_BUILTIN.,
      and includes code that uses the value of
      pkgUSE_BUILTIN.
      set in the previous section.  This typically includes, e.g.,
      adding additional dependency restrictions and listing additional
      files to symlink into pkg${BUILDLINK_DIR} (via
      BUILDLINK_FILES.).pkg
Table of Contents
PLIST generationPLIST_SRCThe PLIST file contains a package's
  “packing list”, i.e. a list of files that belong to
  the package (relative to the ${PREFIX}
  directory it's been installed in) plus some additional statements
  - see the pkg_create(1) man page for a full list.
  This chapter addresses some issues that need attention when
  dealing with the PLIST file (or files, see
  below!).
Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any
    PLIST file you write:
@comment $NetBSD $
An artificial space has been added between NetBSD and $, this is a workaround here to prevent CVS expanding to the filename of the guide. When adding the RCS ID the space should be omitted.
You can use the make print-PLIST command to output a PLIST that matches any new files since the package was extracted. See Section 13.17, “Other helpful targets” for more information on this target.
The PRINT_PLIST_AWK variable takes a set
    of AWK patterns and actions that are used to filter the output of
    print-PLIST.  You can append any chunk of AWK
    scripting you like to it, but be careful with quoting.
For example, to get all files inside the
    libdata/foo directory removed from the
    resulting PLIST:
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+=       /^libdata\/foo/ { next; }
The PRINT_PLIST_AWK transformations are
    evaluated after the file list and directory list are sorted.
    EARLY_PRINT_PLIST_AWK is like
    PRINT_PLIST_AWK except it operates before the file
    list and directory list are sorted.
A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs when a package is installed on a system. This includes the following variables:
${MACHINE_ARCH}, ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH}Some packages like emacs and perl embed information
	  about which architecture they were built on into the
	  pathnames where they install their files. To handle this
	  case, PLIST will be preprocessed before actually used, and
	  the symbol
	  “${MACHINE_ARCH}” will be
	  replaced by what uname -p gives. The
	  same is done if the string
	  ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH} is embedded in
	  PLIST somewhere - use this on packages that have GNU
	  autoconf-created configure scripts.
There used to be a symbol
	    “$ARCH” that
	    was replaced by the output of uname
	    -m, but that's no longer supported and has
	    been removed.
${OPSYS}, ${LOWER_OPSYS}, ${OS_VERSION}Some packages want to embed the OS name and version
	  into some paths.  To do this, use these variables in the
	  PLIST:
	  
${OPSYS} - output of “uname -s”
${LOWER_OPSYS} - lowercase common name (eg. “solaris”)
${OS_VERSION} - “uname -r”
For a list of values which are replaced by
    default, the output of make help topic=PLIST_SUBST as
well as searching the pkgsrc/mk directory with grep for
PLIST_SUBST should help.
If you want to change other variables not listed above, you
    can add variables and their expansions to this variable in the
    following way, similar to MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 12.5, “Optional files”):
PLIST_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
This replaces all occurrences of “${SOMEVAR}”
    in the PLIST with
    “somevalue”.
The PLIST_VARS variable can be used to simplify
    the common case of conditionally including some
    PLIST entries. It can be done by adding
    PLIST_VARS+=fooPLIST.foo variable
    to yes if the entry should be included.
    This will substitute “${PLIST.foo}”
    in the PLIST with either
    “""” or
    “"@comment "”.
    For example, in Makefile:
PLIST_VARS+=    foo
.if condition
PLIST.foo=      yes
.else
And then in PLIST:
@comment $NetBSD $
bin/bar
man/man1/bar.1
${PLIST.foo}bin/foo
${PLIST.foo}man/man1/foo.1
${PLIST.foo}share/bar/foo.data
An artificial space has been added between NetBSD and $, this is a workaround here to prevent CVS expanding to the filename of the guide. When adding the RCS ID the space should be omitted.
Man pages should be installed in compressed form if
    MANZ is set (in bsd.own.mk),
    and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the
    PLIST file, the suffix “.gz” is
    appended/removed automatically for man pages according to
    MANZ and MANCOMPRESSED being set
    or not, see above for details. This modification of the
    PLIST file is done on a copy of it, not
    PLIST itself.
To use one or more files as source for the PLIST used
    in generating the binary package, set the variable
    PLIST_SRC to the names of that file(s).
    The files are later concatenated using cat(1), and the order of things is
    important. The default for PLIST_SRC is
    ${PKGDIR}/PLIST.
Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on the operating system being used. These differences can be automatically handled by using the following files:
PLIST.common
PLIST.${OPSYS}
PLIST.${MACHINE_ARCH}
PLIST.${OPSYS}-${MACHINE_ARCH}
PLIST.common_end
Some packages decide to generate hard-to-guess file names during installation that are hard to wire down.
In such cases, you can set the
    GENERATE_PLIST variable to shell code
    terminated (with a semicolon) that will output PLIST entries which
    will be appended to the PLIST
You can find one example in editors/xemacs:
GENERATE_PLIST+=        ${ECHO} bin/${DISTNAME}-`${WRKSRC}/src/xemacs -sd`.dmp ;
which will append something like
    bin/xemacs-21.4.23-54e8ea71.dmp to the
    PLIST.
    
A “shared directory” is a directory where multiple (and unrelated) packages install files. These directories were problematic because you had to add special tricks in the PLIST to conditionally remove them, or have some centralized package handle them.
In pkgsrc, it is now easy: Each package should create directories and install files as needed; pkg_delete will remove any directories left empty after uninstalling a package.
If a package needs an empty directory to work, create the directory during installation as usual, and also add an entry to the PLIST:
@pkgdir path/to/empty/directory
    or take a look at MAKE_DIRS and
    OWN_DIRS.
    
Table of Contents
This chapter describes the framework known as
pkginstall, whose key features are:
Generic installation and manipulation of directories and files
    outside the pkgsrc-handled tree, LOCALBASE.
Automatic handling of configuration files during installation, provided that packages are correctly designed.
Generation and installation of system startup scripts.
Registration of system users and groups.
Registration of system shells.
Automatic updating of fonts databases.
The following sections inspect each of the above points in detail.
You may be thinking that many of the things described here could be
easily done with simple code in the package's post-installation target
(post-install).  This is incorrect,
as the code in them is only executed when building from source.  Machines
using binary packages could not benefit from it at all (as the code itself
could be unavailable).  Therefore, the only way to achieve any of the items
described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
automatically generated by pkginstall.
As you already know, the PLIST file holds a list
of files and directories that belong to a package.  The names used in it
are relative to the installation prefix (${PREFIX}),
which means that it cannot register files outside this directory (absolute
path names are not allowed).  Despite this restriction, some packages need
to install files outside this location; e.g., under
${VARBASE} or
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}.  The only way to achieve this
is to create such files during installation time by using
installation scripts.
The generic installation scripts are shell scripts that can
contain arbitrary code.  The list of scripts to execute is taken from
the INSTALL_FILE variable, which defaults to
INSTALL.  A similar variable exists for package
removal (DEINSTALL_FILE, whose default is
DEINSTALL).  These scripts can run arbitrary
commands, so they have the potential to create and manage files
anywhere in the file system.
Using these general installation files is not recommended, but may be needed in some special cases. One reason for avoiding them is that the user has to trust the packager that there is no unwanted or simply erroneous code included in the installation script. Also, previously there were many similar scripts for the same functionality, and fixing a common error involved finding and changing all of them.
The pkginstall framework offers another, standardized way.  It
provides generic scripts to abstract the manipulation of such files
and directories based on variables set in the package's
Makefile.  The rest of this section describes
these variables.
The following variables can be set to request the creation of directories anywhere in the file system:
MAKE_DIRS and OWN_DIRS
    contain a list of directories that should be created and should attempt
    to be destroyed by the installation scripts.  The difference between
    the two is that the latter prompts the administrator to remove any
    directories that may be left after deinstallation (because they were
    not empty), while the former does not.  Example:
MAKE_DIRS+=             ${VARBASE}/foo/private
MAKE_DIRS_PERMS and
    OWN_DIRS_PERMS contain a list of tuples describing
    which directories should be created and should attempt to be destroyed
    by the installation scripts.  Each tuple holds the following values,
    separated by spaces: the directory name, its owner, its group and its
    numerical mode.  For example:
MAKE_DIRS_PERMS+=       ${VARBASE}/foo/private \
                        ${REAL_ROOT_USER} ${REAL_ROOT_GROUP} 0700
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their
    non-PERMS counterparts.
Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky
because the PLIST forces all files to be inside it.
To overcome this problem, the only solution is to extract the file in a
known place (i.e., inside the installation prefix) and copy it to the
appropriate location during installation (done by the installation scripts
generated by pkginstall).  We will call the former the reference
file in the following paragraphs, which describe the variables
that can be used to automatically and consistently handle files outside the
installation prefix:
REQD_FILES is a list of pairs of reference
    and target files.  At installation time, the reference file is copied
    to the target if and only if the latter does not exist.  Upon
    deinstallation, the reference file is removed provided that it was
    not modified by the installation.
REQD_FILES_PERMS contains tuples describing
    reference files and targets, including owner, group, and numeric
    permissions that should be set. For example:
REQD_FILES_PERMS+=      ${PREFIX}/share/somefile ${VARBASE}/somefile \
                        ${REAL_ROOT_USER} ${REAL_ROOT_GROUP} 0700
CONF_FILES and
    CONF_FILES_PERMS have the same syntax as
    REQD_FILES and
    REQD_FILES_PERMS respectively.  The difference
    is that these variables are specifically intended for handling
    configuration files, for which additional conventions and
    constraints apply.  See Section 20.2, “Configuration files” for further
    discussion.  Note in particular that while handling of
    configuration files can be disabled by the user (see Section 20.2.5, “Disabling handling of configuration files”), this setting does not affect
    REQD_FILES and
    REQD_FILES_PERMS.
To install an empty file, one can use these macros and
  /dev/null as the reference file.
There are two principles that govern the handling of
configuration files in pkgsrc: first, the user's configuration must
not be lost or overwritten by upgrades or reinstallations; and second,
the default configuration should always be available for reference.
To that end, pkgsrc has a framework specifically for handling
configuration files.  In general, configuration files are installed
into ${PREFIX}/share/examples, and copied from
there to the pertinent etc directory as a
separate step and only as needed.
To make this work, there are three things that need to happen,
any of which may require patching.  First, the package must be told to
read its configuration from the correct place at runtime; this place
is ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} (or possibly a subdirectory
of it) which is often but not always
${PREFIX}/etc.  Second, the package must be
taught to install its default configuration files in
${PREFIX}/share/examples/${PKGBASE}; this is the
point at which patching often becomes required because it is not the
same place as the runtime location.  Third, the configuration files
need to be declared in the package makefile; this is the easy part.
With those elements in place, the right things will happen: the
package install phase and resulting binary package will not touch
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}, and the default configuration
will be copied into place by the pkgsrc framework only if not already
present.  Similarly, upon deinstall the configuration will not be
removed if it has been modified.  (This means that in the case of
reinstallation and upgrades, unmodified configuration files are
updated but modifications are never discarded.)
The following sections describe how to make these things happen and document other relevant knobs available in the pkgsrc infrastructure.
As said before, the PKG_SYSCONFDIR variable
specifies where configuration files shall be installed.  Its contents are
set based upon the following variables:
PKG_SYSCONFBASE: The configuration's root
    directory.  Defaults to ${PREFIX}/etc although it may
    be overridden by the user to point to their preferred location (e.g.,
    /etc, /etc/pkg, etc.).
    Packages must not use it directly.
PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR: A subdirectory of
    PKG_SYSCONFBASE under which the configuration files
    for the package being built shall be installed.  The definition of this
    variable only makes sense in the package's
    Makefile (i.e., it is not user-customizable).
As an example, consider the Apache package,
    www/apache24, which places its
    configuration files under the
    httpd/ subdirectory of
    PKG_SYSCONFBASE.  This should be set in the package
    Makefile.
PKG_SYSCONFVAR: Specifies the name of the
    variable that holds this package's configuration directory (if
    different from PKG_SYSCONFBASE).  It defaults to
    PKGBASE's value, and is always prefixed with
    PKG_SYSCONFDIR.
PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR}: Holds the
    directory where the configuration files for the package identified by
    PKG_SYSCONFVAR's shall be placed.
Based on the above variables, pkginstall determines the value of
PKG_SYSCONFDIR, which is the only
variable that may be used within a package to refer to its configuration
directory.  The algorithm used to set its value is basically the
following:
If PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} is set,
    its value is used.
If the previous variable is not defined but
    PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR is set in the package's
    Makefile, the resulting value is
    ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}/${PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR}.
Otherwise, it is set to
    ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}.
It is worth mentioning that ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} is
automatically added to OWN_DIRS.  This causes it
to be automatically created if needed.  See Section 20.1.1, “Directory manipulation” for further details.  This does not apply to
subdirectories of ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}; they must be manually
created with OWN_DIRS or
MAKE_DIRS.
Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a known place, you need to teach each package where to install its files. In some cases you will have to patch the package Makefiles to achieve it. If you are lucky, though, it may be as easy as passing an extra flag to the configuration script. This is the case for packages using GNU autoconf:
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --sysconfdir=${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
Note that this specifies where the package has to look for its configuration files, not where they will be installed. Fortunately, there is a different way to specify the latter, as seen in the next section, although the combination is rather confusing at first glance.
As discussed above, packages themselves must not
touch the contents of ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
directly.  Bad news is that many software installation scripts
will, out of the box, mess with the contents of that directory.  So what is
the correct procedure to fix this issue?
You must teach the package (usually by manually patching it) to
install any configuration files under the examples hierarchy,
share/examples/${PKGBASE}/.  This way, the
PLIST registers them and the administrator always
has the original copies available.
It turns out that for packages using GNU autoconf it is possible
to create the desired effect by setting sysconfdir
on the make command line at install time.  Consider this example taken
from mail/mutt:
EGDIR=                  ${PREFIX}/share/examples/mutt
INSTALL_MAKE_FLAGS=     ${MAKE_FLAGS} sysconfdir=${EGDIR}
Note that the EGDIR variable, though commonly
used for this purpose, is local to that package and has no meaning
outside it.
Once the required configuration files are in place (i.e., under the
examples hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as reference copies
during the package installation to update what is in
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}.  To achieve this, the variables
CONF_FILES and CONF_FILES_PERMS are
used.  Check out Section 20.1.2, “File manipulation” for further
information about their syntax and their purpose.  Here is an example,
taken from the mail/mutt package:
EGDIR=                  ${PREFIX}/share/examples/mutt
CONF_FILES=             ${EGDIR}/Muttrc ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}/Muttrc
Note that (as in the previous section's example) the
EGDIR variable is specific to the package and has
no meaning outside it.
For reference, the complete example from Mutt is as follows:
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        --sysconfdir=${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
EGDIR=                  ${PREFIX}/share/examples/mutt
CONF_FILES=             ${EGDIR}/Muttrc ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}/Muttrc
INSTALLATION_DIRS+=     ${EGDIR}
INSTALL_MAKE_FLAGS=     ${MAKE_FLAGS} sysconfdir=${EGDIR}
System startup scripts are special files because they must be installed in a place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the installation prefix. Therefore, the same rules described in Section 20.1, “Files and directories outside the installation prefix” apply, and the same solutions can be used. However, pkginstall provides a special mechanism to handle these files.
In order to provide system startup scripts, the package has to:
Store the script inside ${FILESDIR}, with
    the .sh suffix appended.  Considering the
    print/cups-base package as an example, it
    has a cupsd.sh in its files directory.
Tell pkginstall to handle it, appending the name of the script,
    without its extension, to the RCD_SCRIPTS variable.
    Continuing the previous example:
RCD_SCRIPTS+= cupsd
Once this is done, pkginstall will do the following steps for each script in an automated fashion:
Process the file found in the files directory applying all the
    substitutions described in the FILES_SUBST
    variable.
Copy the script from the files directory to the examples
    hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/rc.d/.  Note
    that this reference file must be explicitly registered in the
    PLIST.
Add code to the installation scripts to copy the startup script from the examples hierarchy into the system-wide startup scripts directory.
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the
environment variable PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS prior to package
installation.  Note that the scripts will be always copied inside the
examples hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/rc.d/, no
matter what the value of this variable is.
If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during installation, it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.
Users can be created by adding entries to the
PKG_USERS variable.  Each entry has the following
syntax:
user:group
Further specification of user details may be done by setting
per-user variables.
PKG_UID. is the
numeric UID for the user.
userPKG_GECOS. is the
user's description or comment.
userPKG_HOME. is the
user's home directory, and defaults to
user/nonexistent if not specified.
PKG_SHELL. is the
user's shell, and defaults to user/sbin/nologin if
not specified.
Similarly, groups can be created by adding entries to the
PKG_GROUPS variable, whose syntax is:
group
The numeric GID of the group may be set by defining
PKG_GID..group
If a package needs to create the users and groups at an earlier
stage, then it can set USERGROUP_PHASE to either
configure,build, or
pre-install to indicate the phase before which the
users and groups are created. In this case, the numeric UIDs and GIDs
of the created users and groups are automatically hardcoded into the
final installation scripts.
Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell
database, /etc/shells, to make things easier to the
administrator.  This must be done from the installation scripts to keep
binary packages working on any system.  pkginstall provides an easy way to
accomplish this task.
When a package provides a shell interpreter, it has to set the
PKG_SHELL variable to its absolute file name.  This will
add some hooks to the installation scripts to handle it.  Consider the
following example, taken from shells/zsh:
PKG_SHELL=      ${PREFIX}/bin/zsh
Packages that install X11 fonts should update the database files that index the fonts within each fonts directory. This can easily be accomplished within the pkginstall framework.
When a package installs X11 fonts, it must list the directories in
which fonts are installed in the
FONTS_DIRS. variables,
where typetype can be one of “ttf”,
“type1” or “x11”.  This will add hooks to the
installation scripts to run the appropriate commands to update the fonts
database files within each of those directories.  For convenience, if the
directory path is relative, it is taken to be relative to the package's
installation prefix.  Consider the following example, taken from fonts/dbz-ttf:
FONTS_DIRS.ttf= ${PREFIX}/share/fonts/X11/TTF
Table of Contents
mk.confOne appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different platforms. As a result, it is important to ensure, where possible, that packages in pkgsrc are portable. This chapter mentions some particular details you should pay attention to while working on pkgsrc.
mk.conf
The pkgsrc user can configure pkgsrc by overriding several
    variables in the file pointed to by MAKECONF,
    which is mk.conf by default. When you
    want to use those variables in the preprocessor directives of
    make(1) (for example .if or
    .for), you need to include the file
    ../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk before, which in turn
    loads the user preferences.
But note that some variables may not be completely defined
    after ../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk has been
    included, as they may contain references to variables that are
    not yet defined. In shell commands (the lines in
    Makefile that are indented with a tab) this
    is no problem, since variables are only expanded when they are
    used. But in the preprocessor directives mentioned above and in
    dependency lines (of the form target:
    dependencies) the variables are expanded at load
    time.
To check whether a variable can be used at load time, run pkglint -Wall on your package.
Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be in a number of ways:
When fetching the distfiles, some packages require user interaction such as entering username/password or accepting a license on a web page.
When extracting the distfiles, some packages may ask for passwords.
help to configure the package before it is built
help during the build process
help during the installation of a package
A package can set the INTERACTIVE_STAGE
    variable to define which stages need interaction. This should be
    done in the package's Makefile, e.g.:
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= configure install
The user can then decide to skip this package by setting the
    BATCH variable. Packages that require interaction
    are also excluded from bulk builds.
Authors of software can choose the licence under which software can be copied. The Free Software Foundation has declared some licenses "Free", and the Open Source Initiative has a definition of "Open Source".
By default, pkgsrc allows packages with Free or Open Source
    licenses to be built.  To allow packages with other licenses to be
    built as well, the pkgsrc user needs to add these licenses to the
    ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable in mk.conf.  Note
    that this variable only affects which packages may be
    built, while the license terms often also
    restrict the actual use of the package and its redistribution.
One might want to only install packages with a BSD license,
    or the GPL, and not the other.  The free licenses are added to the
    default ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable.  The pkgsrc
    user can override the default by setting the
    ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable with "=" instead
    of "+=".  The licenses accepted by default are defined in the
    DEFAULT_ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable in the file
    pkgsrc/mk/license.mk.
The license tag mechanism is intended to address
    copyright-related issues surrounding building, installing and
    using a package, and not to address redistribution issues (see
    RESTRICTED and
    NO_SRC_ON_FTP, etc.).
    Packages with redistribution restrictions should set these
    tags.
Denoting that a package may be copied according to a
    particular license is done by placing the license in
    pkgsrc/licenses and setting the
    LICENSE variable to a string identifying the
    license, e.g. in graphics/xv:
LICENSE= xv-license
When trying to build, the user will get a notice that the
    package is covered by a license which has not been placed in the
    ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable:
%make===> xv-3.10anb9 has an unacceptable license: xv-license. ===> To view the license, enter "/usr/bin/make show-license". ===> To indicate acceptance, add this line to your /etc/mk.conf: ===> ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license *** Error code 1
In case a package requires multiple licenses, you can add all of
    them to the LICENSE variable, connected with the upper-case keyword
    AND. If the user has a choice between multiple
    licenses, you can add them connected with the upper-case keyword
    OR, for example:
LICENSE= isc AND apache-2.0 LICENSE= 2-clause-bsd OR ruby-license
The license can be viewed with make
    show-license, and if the user so chooses, the line
    printed above can be added to mk.conf to
    convey to pkgsrc that it should not in the future fail because of
    that license:
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
The use of LICENSE=shareware,
    LICENSE=no-commercial-use, and similar language
    is deprecated because it does not crisply refer to a particular
    license text.  Another problem with such usage is that it does not
    enable a user to tell pkgsrc to proceed for a single package
    without also telling pkgsrc to proceed for all packages with that
    tag.
When adding a package with a new license, the following steps are required:
Check whether the license qualifies as Free or Open Source by
    referencing Various
    Licenses and Comments about Them and Licenses by Name |
    Open Source Initiative.  If this is the case, the filename in
    pkgsrc/licenses/ does not need the
    -license suffix, and the license name should be
    added to:
DEFAULT_ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES in
    pkgsrc/mk/license.mk
default_acceptable_licenses in
    pkgsrc/pkgtools/pkg_install/files/lib/license.c
The license text should be added to
    pkgsrc/licenses for displaying.  A list of known
    licenses can be seen in this directory.
When the license changes (in a way other than formatting), make sure that the new license has a different name (e.g., append the version number if it exists, or the date). Just because a user told pkgsrc to build programs under a previous version of a license does not mean that pkgsrc should build programs under the new licenses. The higher-level point is that pkgsrc does not evaluate licenses for reasonableness; the only test is a mechanistic test of whether a particular text has been approved by either of two bodies (FSF or OSI).
Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed. By declaring the restrictions, package tools can automatically refrain from e.g. placing binary packages on FTP sites.
There are four possible restrictions, which are the cross product of sources (distfiles) and binaries not being placed on FTP sites and CD-ROMs. Because this is rarely the exact language in any license, and because non-Free licenses tend to be different from each other, pkgsrc adopts a definition of FTP and CD-ROM. "FTP" means making the source or binary file available over the Internet at no charge. "CD-ROM" means making the source or binary available on some kind of media, together with other source and binary packages, which is sold for a distribution charge.
In order to encode these restrictions, the package system defines five make variables that can be set to note these restrictions:
RESTRICTED
This variable should be set whenever a restriction exists (regardless of its kind). Set this variable to a string containing the reason for the restriction. It should be understood that those wanting to understand the restriction will have to read the license, and perhaps seek advice of counsel.
NO_BIN_ON_CDROM
Binaries may not be placed on CD-ROM containing other
	binary packages, for which a distribution charge may be made.
	In this case, set this variable to
	${RESTRICTED}.
NO_BIN_ON_FTP
Binaries may not made available on the Internet without
	charge.  In this case, set this variable to
	${RESTRICTED}.  If this variable is set,
	binary packages will not be included on ftp.NetBSD.org.
NO_SRC_ON_CDROM
Distfiles may not be placed on CD-ROM, together with
	other distfiles, for which a fee may be charged.  In this
	case, set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}.
	
NO_SRC_ON_FTP
Distfiles may not made available via FTP at no charge.
	In this case, set this variable to
	${RESTRICTED}.  If this variable is set,
	the distfile(s) will not be mirrored on ftp.NetBSD.org.
Please note that packages will be removed from pkgsrc when the distfiles are not distributable and cannot be obtained for a period of one full quarter branch. Packages with manual/interactive fetch must have a maintainer and it is his/her responsibility to ensure this.
Your package may depend on some other package being present,
    and there are various ways of expressing this dependency.
    pkgsrc supports the DEPENDS,
    BUILD_DEPENDS,
    TOOL_DEPENDS, and
    TEST_DEPENDS definitions, the
    USE_TOOLS definition, as well as dependencies
    via buildlink3.mk, which is the preferred way
    to handle dependencies, and which uses the variables named above.
    See Chapter 18, Buildlink methodology for more information.
The basic difference is that the DEPENDS
    definition registers that pre-requisite in the binary package so it
    will be pulled in when the binary package is later installed, whilst
    the BUILD_DEPENDS, TOOL_DEPENDS,
    and TEST_DEPENDS definitions do not, marking a
    dependency that is only needed for building or testing the resulting
    package. See also Chapter 14, Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch for more information.
This means that if you only need a package present whilst
    you are building or testing, it should be noted as a
    TOOL_DEPENDS,
    BUILD_DEPENDS, or
    TEST_DEPENDS.  When cross-compiling,
    TOOL_DEPENDS are native
    packages, i.e. packages for the architecture where the package
    is built;
    BUILD_DEPENDS are target
    packages, i.e., packages for the architecture for which the package
    is built.
The format for a DEPENDS,
    BUILD_DEPENDS, TOOL_DEPENDS,
    and TEST_DEPENDS definition is:
<pre-req-package-name>:../../<category>/<pre-req-package>
Please note that the “pre-req-package-name” may include any of the wildcard version numbers recognized by pkg_info(1).
If your package needs another package's binaries or
	libraries to build and run, and if that package has a
	buildlink3.mk file available, use it:
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
If your package needs another package's binaries or
	libraries only for building, and if that package has a
	buildlink3.mk file available, use it:
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
but set
	BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.
	to make it a build dependency only. This case is rather
	rare.jpeg?=build
If your package needs binaries from another package to build,
	use the TOOL_DEPENDS definition:
TOOL_DEPENDS+= itstool-[0-9]*:../../textproc/itstool
If your package needs static libraries to link against, header
	files to include, etc. from another package to build,
	use the BUILD_DEPENDS definition.
If your package needs a library with which to link and
	there is no buildlink3.mk file
	available, create one. Using
	DEPENDS won't be sufficient because the
	include files and libraries will be hidden from the compiler.
If your package needs some executable to be able to run
	correctly and if there's no
	buildlink3.mk file, this is specified
	using the DEPENDS variable. The
	print/lyx package needs to
	be able to execute the latex binary from the tex-latex-bin package
	when it runs, and that is specified:
DEPENDS+= tex-latex-bin-[0-9]*:../../print/tex-latex-bin
If your package includes a test suite that has extra
        dependencies only required for this purpose (frequently this
        can be run as a “make test” target), use the
        TEST_DEPENDS variable.
You can use wildcards in package dependencies. Note that such wildcard dependencies are retained when creating binary packages. The dependency is checked when installing the binary package and any package which matches the pattern will be used. Wildcard dependencies should be used with care.
The “-[0-9]*” should be used instead of
	“-*” to avoid potentially ambiguous matches
	such as “tk-postgresql” matching a
	“tk-*” DEPENDS.
Wildcards can also be used to specify that a package will only build against a certain minimum version of a pre-requisite:
DEPENDS+= ImageMagick>=6.0:../../graphics/ImageMagick
This means that the package will build using version 6.0 of ImageMagick or newer. Such a dependency may be warranted if, for example, the command line options of an executable have changed.
If you need to depend on minimum versions of libraries,
	set
	BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.
	to the appropriate pattern before including its
	pkgbuildlink3.mk file, e.g.
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.jpeg+= jpeg>=9.0 .include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
For security fixes, please update the package vulnerabilities file. See Section 21.1.9, “Handling packages with security problems” for more information.
If your package needs files from another package to build,
    add the relevant distribution files to
    DISTFILES, so they will be extracted
    automatically. See the print/ghostscript package for an example.
    (It relies on the jpeg sources being present in source form
    during the build.)
Your package may conflict with other packages users might already have installed on their system, e.g., if your package installs the same set of files as another package in the pkgsrc tree.
For example, x11/libXaw3d
    and x11/Xaw-Xpm
    install the same shared library, thus you set in
    pkgsrc/x11/libXaw3d/Makefile:
CONFLICTS= Xaw-Xpm-[0-9]*
and in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw-Xpm/Makefile:
CONFLICTS= libXaw3d-[0-9]*
pkg_add(1) is able to detect attempts to install packages that conflict with existing packages and abort. However, in many situations this is too late in the process. Binary package managers will not know about the conflict until they attempt to install the package after already downloading it and all its dependencies. Users may also waste time building a package and its dependencies only to find out at the end that it conflicts with another package they have installed.
To avoid these issues CONFLICTS entries
    should be added in all cases where it is known that packages conflict
    with each other.  These CONFLICTS entries are
    exported in pkg_summary(5) files and consumed by binary package
    managers to inform users that packages cannot be installed onto
    the target system.
There are several reasons why a package might be
    instructed to not build under certain circumstances.  If the
    package builds and runs on most platforms, the exceptions
    should be noted with BROKEN_ON_PLATFORM.  If
    the package builds and runs on a small handful of platforms,
    set BROKEN_EXCEPT_ON_PLATFORM instead.
    Both BROKEN_ON_PLATFORM and
    BROKEN_EXCEPT_ON_PLATFORM are OS triples
    (OS-version-platform) that can use glob-style
    wildcards.
If a package is not appropriate for some platforms (as
    opposed to merely broken), a different set of variables should be
    used as this affects failure reporting and statistics.
    If the package is appropriate for most platforms, the exceptions
    should be noted with NOT_FOR_PLATFORM.  If
    the package is appropriate for only a small handful of platforms
    (often exactly one), set ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM instead.
    Both ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM and
    NOT_FOR_PLATFORM are OS triples
    (OS-version-platform) that can use glob-style
    wildcards.
Some packages are tightly bound to a specific version of an
    operating system, e.g. LKMs or sysutils/lsof.  Such binary packages are not
    backwards compatible with other versions of the OS, and should be
    uploaded to a version specific directory on the FTP server.  Mark
    these packages by setting OSVERSION_SPECIFIC to
    “yes”.  This variable is not currently used by any of
    the package system internals, but may be used in the
    future.
If the package should be skipped (for example, because it
    provides functionality already provided by the system), set
    PKG_SKIP_REASON to a descriptive message.  If
    the package should fail because some preconditions are not met,
    set PKG_FAIL_REASON to a descriptive
    message.
To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been
    installed, the PKG_PRESERVE definition should
    be set in the package Makefile. This will be carried into any
    binary package that is made from this pkgsrc entry. A
    “preserved” package will
    not be deleted using pkg_delete(1) unless the
    “-f” option is used.
When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in
    pkgsrc/doc/pkg-vulnerabilities.
    Entries in that file consist of three parts:
package version pattern
type of vulnerability (please cut'n'paste an existing one where possible)
URL providing additional information about the issue
For the package version pattern please always use `<' to
    mark an upper bound (not `<='!). This will avoid possible
    problems due unrelated PKGREVISION bumps not
    related to security fixes. Lower bounds can be added too, using
    '>' or '>='. For example,
    “foo>=1<1.2” would mark
    versions 1.0 (included) to 1.2 (excluded) of
    “foo” as affected by the security
    issue.
Entries should always be added at the bottom of the file.
When fixing packages, please modify the upper bound of the
    corresponding entry. To continue the previous example, if a fix
    was backported to version 1.1nb2, change the previous pattern to
    “foo>=1<1.1nb2”.
To locally test a package version pattern against a
    PKGNAME you can use the pkg_admin
    pmatch command.
The URL should be as permanent as possible and provide as much information about the issue as possible. CVE entries are preferred.
After committing that file, ask pkgsrc-security@NetBSD.org to update the file on ftp.NetBSD.org.
After fixing the vulnerability by a patch, its
    PKGREVISION should be increased (this is of
    course not necessary if the problem is fixed by using a newer
    release of the software), and the pattern in the
    pkg-vulnerabilities file must be updated.
Also, if the fix should be applied to the stable pkgsrc branch, be sure to submit a pullup request!
Binary packages already on ftp.NetBSD.org will be handled semi-automatically by a weekly cron job.
In case a security issue is disputed, please contact pkgsrc-security@NetBSD.org.
When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful
    to change the version number in PKGNAME. To
    avoid conflicting with future versions by the original author, a
    “nb1”, “nb2”, ... suffix can be used
    on package versions by setting PKGREVISION=1
    (2, ...). The “nb” is treated like a
    “.” by the package tools. e.g.
DISTNAME= foo-17.42 PKGREVISION= 9
will result in a PKGNAME of
    “foo-17.42nb9”. If you want to use the original
    value of PKGNAME without the “nbX”
    suffix, e.g. for setting DIST_SUBDIR, use
    PKGNAME_NOREV.
When a new release of the package is released, the
    PKGREVISION should be removed, e.g. on a new
    minor release of the above package, things should be like:
DISTNAME= foo-17.43
PKGREVISION should be incremented for any
    non-trivial change in the resulting binary package.  Without a
    PKGREVISION bump, someone with the previous
    version installed has no way of knowing that their package is out
    of date.  Thus, changes without increasing
    PKGREVISION are essentially labeled "this is so
    trivial that no reasonable person would want to upgrade", and this
    is the rough test for when increasing
    PKGREVISION is appropriate.  Examples of
    changes that do not merit increasing
    PKGREVISION are:
Changing HOMEPAGE,
      MAINTAINER, OWNER, or
      comments in Makefile.
Changing build variables if the resulting binary package is the same.
Changing
      DESCR.
Adding PKG_OPTIONS if the
      default options don't change.
Examples of changes that do merit an increase to
    PKGREVISION include:
Security fixes
Changes or additions to a patch file
Changes to the
      PLIST
A dependency is changed or renamed.
PKGREVISION must also be incremented when dependencies have ABI changes.
When you want to replace the same text in multiple files, or multiple times in the same file, it is cumbersome to maintain a patch file for this. This is where the SUBST framework steps in. It provides an easy-to-use interface for replacing text in files. It just needs the following information:
In which phase of the package build cycle should the replacement happen?
In which files should the replacement happen?
Which text should be replaced with what?
This information is encoded in a block of SUBST
variables. A minimal example is:
SUBST_CLASSES+=         paths
SUBST_STAGE.paths=      pre-configure
SUBST_FILES.paths=      src/*.c
SUBST_SED.paths=        -e 's,/usr/local,${PREFIX},g'
Translated into English, it means: In the pre-configure stage (that
is, after applying the patches from the patches/ directory and before
running the configure script and the portability check), replace the text
/usr/local with the content of the variable
PREFIX.
Each SUBST block starts by appending an identifier to
SUBST_CLASSES (note the +=). This
identifier can be chosen freely by the package. If there should ever be
duplicate identifiers, the pkgsrc infrastructure will catch this and fail
early, so don't worry about name collisions.
Except for SUBST_CLASSES, all variables in a
SUBST block are parameterized using this identifier. In the remainder of
this section, these parameterized variables are written as
SUBST_STAGE.*.
SUBST_CLASSES+=         paths
SUBST_STAGE.paths=      pre-configure
SUBST_MESSAGE.paths=    Fixing absolute paths.
SUBST_FILES.paths=      src/*.c
SUBST_FILES.paths+=     scripts/*.sh
SUBST_SED.paths=        -e 's,"/usr/local,"${PREFIX},g'
SUBST_SED.paths+=       -e 's,"/var/log,"${VARBASE}/log,g'
SUBST_VARS.paths=       LOCALBASE PREFIX PKGVERSION
To get a complete picture about the SUBST substitutions, run
bmake show-all-subst. If something doesn't work as
expected, run pkglint on the package, which detects several typical
mistakes surrounding the SUBST blocks. For any questions that might
remain after this, have a look at
mk/subst.mk.
The SUBST_STAGE.* is one of
{pre,do,post}-{extract,patch,configure,build,test,install}. Of these,
pre-configure is used most often, by far. The most
popular stages are, in chronological order:
post-extractThe substitutions are applied immediately after the distfiles are extracted. Running bmake extract on the package will leave no traces of the original files.
When the substitution applies to files for which there is also a
patch in the patches/ directory, this means that the
patches will be computed based on the result of the substitution. When
these patches are sent to the upstream maintainer later, to be fixed in
the upstream package, these patches may no longer match what the upstream
author is used to. Because of this, pre-configure is
often a better choice.
pre-configureThe substitutions are applied after the patches from the
patches/ directory. This makes it possible to run
bmake patch on the package, after which the patches
can be edited using the tools pkgvi and mkpatches from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package.
When updating the patches, it is helpful to explicitly separate the
bmake patch from the bmake
configure, and to only edit the patches between these commands.
Otherwise the substitutions from the SUBST block will end up in the patch
file. When this happens in really obvious ways, pkglint will complain
about patches that contain a hard-coded /usr/pkg
instead of the correct and intended @PREFIX@, but it
can only detect these really obvious
cases.
do-configureThis stage should only be used if the package defines a
pre-configure action itself, and the substitution must
happen after that. Typical examples are packages that use the
pre-configure stage to regenerate the GNU configure
script from
configure.ac.
post-configureThis stage is used to fix up any mistakes by the configure stage.
pre-buildThis stage should only be used for substitutions that are
clearly related to building the package, not for fixing the
configuration. Substitutions for pathnames (such as replacing
/usr/local with ${PREFIX}) or
user names (such as replacing @MY_USER@ with the
actual username) belong in pre-configure or post-configure
instead.
post-buildJust as with pre-build, this stage should only be used
for substitutions that are clearly related to building the package, not
for fixing the configuration. Substitutions for pathnames (such as
replacing /usr/local with
${PREFIX}) or user names (such as replacing
@MY_USER@ with the actual username) belong in
pre-configure or post-configure instead.
A typical use is to update pkg-config files to include the rpath compiler options.
pre-installIn general, the install phase should be as simple as possible. As with the pre-build and post-build stages, it should not be used to fix pathnames or user names, these belong in pre-configure instead. There are only few legitimate use cases for applying substitutions in this stage.
The SUBST_FILES.* variable contains a list of
filename patterns. These patterns are relative to
WRKSRC since that is where most substitutions happen.
A typical example is:
SUBST_FILES.path= Makefile */Makefile */*/Makefile *.[ch]
The above patterns, especially the last, are quite broad. The SUBST
implementation checks that each filename pattern that is mentioned here
has an effect. For example, if none of the
*/*/Makefile files contains the patterns to be found
and substituted, that filename pattern is redundant and should be left
out. By default, the SUBST framework will complain with an error message.
If the text to be substituted occurs in some of the files from a single
pattern, but not in all of them, that is totally ok, and the SUBST
framework will only print an INFO message for those files.
If there is a good reason for having redundant filename patterns,
set SUBST_NOOP_OK.* to yes.
Another popular way of choosing the files for the substitutions is via a shell command, like this:
C_FILES_CMD=            cd ${WRKSRC} && ${FIND} . -name '*.c'
SUBST_FILES.path=       ${C_FILES_CMD:sh}
The variable name C_FILES_CMD in this example is
freely chosen and independent of the SUBST framework.
In this variant, the SUBST_FILES.* variable
lists each file individually. Thereby chances are higher that there are
filename patterns in which no substitution happens. Since the SUBST
framework cannot know whether the filename patterns in
SUBST_FILES.* have been explicitly listed in the
Makefile (where any redundant filename pattern would be suspicious) or
been generated by a shell command (in which redundant filename patterns
are more likely and to be expected), it will complain about these
redundant filename patterns. Therefore, SUBST blocks that use a shell
command to generate the list of filename patterns often need to set
SUBST_NOOP_OK.* to yes.
In most cases, the substitutions are given using one or more sed(1) commands, like this:
SUBST_SED.path=         -e 's|/usr/local|${PREFIX}|g'
Each of the sed commands needs to be preceded by the
-e option and should be specified on a line of its
own, to avoid hiding short sed commands at the end of a line.
Since the sed commands often contain shell metacharacters as the
separator (the | in the above example), it is common
to enclose them in single quotes.
A common substitution is to replace placeholders of the form
@VARNAME@ with their pkgsrc counterpart variable
${VARNAME}. A typical example is:
SUBST_VARS.path= PREFIX
This type of substitutions is typically done by the GNU configure
scripts during the do-configure stage, but in some cases these need to be
overridden. The same pattern is also used when a package defines patches
that replace previously hard-coded paths like
/usr/local with a @PREFIX@
placeholder first, which then gets substituted by the actual
${PREFIX} in the pre-configure stage. In many of these
cases, it works equally well to just use the SUBST framework to directly
replace /usr/local with ${PREFIX},
thereby omitting the intermediate patch file.
If the above is not flexible enough, it is possible to not use sed at all for the substitution but to specify an entirely different command, like this:
SUBST_FILTER_CMD.path=  LC_ALL=C ${TR} -d '\r'
This is used for the few remaining packages in which the distributed files use Windows-style line endings that need to be converted to UNIX-style line endings.
If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set
    DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES and a make
    fetch will call files/getsite.sh
    with the name of each file to download as an argument, expecting
    it to output the URL of the directory from which to download
    it. graphics/ns-cult3d is an
    example of this usage.
If the download can't be automated, because the user must
    submit personal information to apply for a password, or must pay
    for the source, or whatever, you can set
    FETCH_MESSAGE to a list of lines that are
    displayed to the user before aborting the build. Example:
FETCH_MESSAGE=  "Please download the files"
FETCH_MESSAGE+= "    "${DISTFILES:Q}
FETCH_MESSAGE+= "manually from "${MASTER_SITES:Q}"."
Sometimes authors of a software package make some modifications after the software was released, and they put up a new distfile without changing the package's version number. If a package is already in pkgsrc at that time, the checksum will no longer match. The contents of the new distfile should be compared against the old one before changing anything, to make sure the distfile was really updated on purpose, and that no trojan horse or so crept in. Please mention that the distfiles were compared and what was found in your commit message.
Then, the correct way to work around this is to set
    DIST_SUBDIR to a unique directory name, usually
    based on PKGNAME_NOREV (but take care with
    python or ruby packages, where PKGNAME includes
    a variable prefix). All DISTFILES and
    PATCHFILES for this package will be put in that
    subdirectory of the local distfiles directory. (See Section 21.1.10, “How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package” for more details.) In case this
    happens more often, PKGNAME can be used (thus
    including the nbX suffix) or a date stamp can
    be appended, like
    ${PKGNAME_NOREV}-YYYYMMDD.
DIST_SUBDIR is also used when a distfile's
    name does not contain a version and the distfile is apt to change. In
    cases where the likelihood of this is very small,
    DIST_SUBDIR might not be required. Additionally,
    DIST_SUBDIR must not be removed unless the
    distfile name changes, even if a package is being moved or
    renamed.
Do not forget regenerating the distinfo file
    after that, since it contains the DIST_SUBDIR
    path in the filenames.
    Also, increase the PKGREVISION if the installed package is different.
    Furthermore, a mail to the package's authors seems appropriate
    telling them that changing distfiles after releases without
    changing the file names is not good practice.
Helper methods exist for packages hosted on github.com which
    will often have distfile names that clash with other packages, for
    example 1.0.tar.gz. Use one of the three recipes
    from below:
If your distfile URL looks similar to
      https://github.com/username/example/archive/v1.0.zip,
      then you are packaging a tagged release.
DISTNAME=       example-1.0
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GITHUB:=username/}
#GITHUB_PROJECT= example    # can be omitted if same as DISTNAME
GITHUB_TAG=     v${PKGVERSION_NOREV}
EXTRACT_SUFX=   .zip
Here, DISTNAME combined with use of GITHUB_TAG leads the
    file fetching infrastructure to save the resulting file locally as
    example-1.0.zip.
If your distfile looks similar to
      https://github.com/username/example/archive/988881adc9fc3655077dc2d4d757d480b5ea0e11 and is from a commit before the first
      release, then set the package version to 0.0.0.N, where N is the number
      of commits to the repository, and set GITHUB_TAG to the commit hash.
      This will (almost) ensure that the first tagged release will have a
      version greater than this one so that package upgrades will function
      properly.
DISTNAME=       example-0.0.0.347
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GITHUB:=username/}
#GITHUB_PROJECT= example    # can be omitted if same as DISTNAME
GITHUB_TAG=     988881adc9fc3655077dc2d4d757d480b5ea0e11
If your distfile looks similar to
      https://github.com/username/example/archive/988881adc9fc3655077dc2d4d757d480b5ea0e11 and is from a commit after a release,
      then include the last release version and the commit count since that
      release in the package version and set GITHUB_TAG to the commit hash.
      The latest release and commit count are shown in the output of
      "git describe --tags":
      
# git clone https://github.com/username/example # cd example # git describe --tags 1.2.3-5-g988881a
DISTNAME=       example-1.2.3.5
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GITHUB:=username/}
#GITHUB_PROJECT= example    # can be omitted if same as DISTNAME
GITHUB_TAG=     988881adc9fc3655077dc2d4d757d480b5ea0e11
If your distfile URL looks similar to
      https://github.com/username/example/releases/download/rel-1.6/offensive-1.6.zip,
      then you are packaging a release.
DISTNAME=       offensive-1.6
PKGNAME=        ${DISTNAME:S/offensive/proper/}
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GITHUB:=username/}
GITHUB_PROJECT= example
GITHUB_RELEASE= rel-${PKGVERSION_NOREV} # usually just set this to ${DISTNAME}
EXTRACT_SUFX=   .zip
pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different
    object formats like a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do
    shared library and dynamic loading at all. To accompany this,
    varying commands and options have to be passed to the
    compiler, linker, etc. to get the Right Thing, which can be
    pretty annoying especially if you don't have all the machines
    at your hand to test things.  The
    devel/libtool pkg
    can help here, as it just “knows” how to build
    both static and dynamic libraries from a set of source files,
    thus being platform-independent.
Here's how to use libtool in a package in seven simple steps:
Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package
	Makefile.
For library objects, use “${LIBTOOL} --mode=compile
	${CC}” in place of “${CC}”. You could even
	add it to the definition of CC, if only
	libraries are being built in a given Makefile. This one command
	will build both PIC and non-PIC library objects, so you need not
	have separate shared and non-shared library rules.
For the linking of the library, remove any “ar”, “ranlib”, and “ld -Bshareable” commands, and instead use:
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link \
    ${CC} -o ${.TARGET:.a=.la} \
        ${OBJS:.o=.lo} \
        -rpath ${PREFIX}/lib \
        -version-info major:minor
Note that the library is changed to have a
	.la extension, and the objects are
	changed to have a .lo
	extension. Change OBJS as
	necessary. This automatically creates all of the
	.a,
	.so.major.minor, and ELF symlinks (if
	necessary) in the build directory. Be sure to include
	“-version-info”, especially when major and
	minor are zero, as libtool will otherwise strip off the
	shared library version.
From the libtool manual:
So, libtool library versions are described by three integers: CURRENT The most recent interface number that this library implements. REVISION The implementation number of the CURRENT interface. AGE The difference between the newest and oldest interfaces that this library implements. In other words, the library implements all the interface numbers in the range from number `CURRENT - AGE' to `CURRENT'. If two libraries have identical CURRENT and AGE numbers, then the dynamic linker chooses the library with the greater REVISION number.
The “-release” option will produce different results for a.out and ELF (excluding symlinks) in only one case. An ELF library of the form “libfoo-release.so.x.y” will have a symlink of “libfoo.so.x.y” on an a.out platform. This is handled automatically.
The “-rpath argument” is the install directory of the library being built.
In the PLIST, include only the
	.la file, the other files will be
	added automatically.
When linking shared object (.so)
	files, i.e. files that are loaded via dlopen(3), NOT
	shared libraries, use “-module
	-avoid-version” to prevent them getting version
	tacked on.
The PLIST file gets the
	foo.so entry.
When linking programs that depend on these libraries
	before they are installed, preface
	the cc(1) or ld(1) line with “${LIBTOOL}
	--mode=link”, and it will find the correct
	libraries (static or shared), but please be aware that
	libtool will not allow you to specify a relative path in
	-L (such as “-L../somelib”), because it
	expects you to change that argument to be the
	.la file. e.g.
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog -L../somelib -lsomelib
should be changed to:
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog ../somelib/somelib.la
and it will do the right thing with the libraries.
When installing libraries, preface the install(1)
	or cp(1) command with “${LIBTOOL}
	--mode=install”, and change the library name to
	.la. e.g.
${LIBTOOL} --mode=install ${BSD_INSTALL_LIB} ${SOMELIB:.a=.la} ${PREFIX}/lib
This will install the static .a,
	shared library, any needed symlinks, and run
	ldconfig(8).
In your PLIST, include only
	the .la
	file (this is a change from previous behaviour).
Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the
    package Makefile. This will override the package's own libtool
    in most cases.  For older libtool using packages,  libtool is
    made by ltconfig script during the do-configure step; you can
    check the libtool script location by doing make
    configure; find work*/ -name libtool.
LIBTOOL_OVERRIDE specifies which libtool
    scripts, relative to WRKSRC, to override.  By
    default, it is set to “libtool */libtool
    */*/libtool”.  If this does not match the location of the
    package's libtool script(s), set it as appropriate.
If you do not need *.a static
    libraries built and installed, then use
    SHLIBTOOL_OVERRIDE instead.
If your package makes use of the platform-independent library for loading dynamic shared objects, that comes with libtool (libltdl), you should include devel/libltdl/buildlink3.mk.
Some packages use libtool incorrectly so that the package may not work or build in some circumstances. Some of the more common errors are:
The inclusion of a shared object (-module) as a dependent library in an executable or library. This in itself isn't a problem if one of two things has been done:
The shared object is named correctly, i.e.
	    libfoo.la, not
	    foo.la
The -dlopen option is used when linking an executable.
The use of libltdl without the correct calls to initialisation routines.
	The function lt_dlinit() should be called and the macro
	LTDL_SET_PRELOADED_SYMBOLS included in
	executables.
If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed
    to regenerate the
    configure
    script and Makefile.in makefile
    templates from configure.ac and
    Makefile.am,
    then they should be executed in a pre-configure target:
USE_TOOLS+=	autoconf automake autoreconf
GNU_CONFIGURE=	yes
...
pre-configure:
        set -e; cd ${WRKSRC} && autoreconf -fi
...
Packages which use GNU Automake will sometimes
    require GNU Make (gmake in
    USE_TOOLS),
    but not always.  Note that autoreconf
    only needs to be executed if configure.ac
    or Makefiles are modified, or configure
    is not present.
There are times when the configure process makes
    additional changes to the generated files, which then causes
    the build process to try to re-execute the automake sequence.
    This is prevented by touching various files in the configure
    stage. If this causes problems with your package you can set
    AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE=NO in the package
    Makefile.
Packages using Meson to configure need to include:
.include "../../devel/meson/build.mk"
In nearly all cases (any program with dependencies),
    pkg-config needs to be added to
    USE_TOOLS.  If the package installs
    translation files for non-English languages, also
    add msgfmt and xgettext:
USE_TOOLS+= pkg-config msgfmt xgettext
If any options need to be passed to Meson, use
    MESON_ARGS instead of
    CONFIGURE_ARGS:
MESON_ARGS+= -Dx11=false
Compilers for the C and C++ languages come with the NetBSD base system. By default, pkgsrc assumes that a package is written in C and will hide all other compilers (via the wrapper framework, see Chapter 18, Buildlink methodology).
To declare which languages should be made available through
    pkgsrc's compiler wrappers, use 
    the USE_LANGUAGES variable. Allowed values
    currently are:
c, c++, fortran, fortran77, java, objc, obj-c++, and ada.
(and any combination). The default is “c”. Packages using GNU configure scripts, even if written in C++, usually need a C compiler for the configure phase.
To declare which features a package requires from the
    compiler, set either USE_CC_FEATURES
    or USE_CXX_FEATURES. Allowed values for
    USE_CC_FEATURES are currently:
c11, c99, has_include
    Allowed values for USE_CXX_FEATURES are
    currently:
c++11, c++14, c++17, c++20, has_include, regex, filesystem, charconv, parallelism_ts, unique_ptr, put_time, is_trivially_copy_constructible
Note at present these variables only affect use of GCC, not other compilers.
Language variants like gnu99 and
    c++11 can be specified in FORCE_C_STD
    and FORCE_CXX_STD if the package does not explicitly set
    -std=... when compiling (i.e. the package
    assumes the compiler defaults to C++11 or some other standard).
    This is a common bug in upstream build systems.
Allowed values for FORCE_C_STD are
    currently:
c90, c99, c11, gnu90, gnu99, gnu11
Allowed values for FORCE_CXX_STD are
    currently:
c++03, c++11, c++14, c++17, c++20, gnu++03, gnu++11, gnu++14, gnu++17, gnu++20
Note at present these variables only affect use of GCC and Clang.
If a program is written in Java, use the Java framework in
    pkgsrc.  The package must include
    ../../mk/java-vm.mk.  This Makefile fragment
    provides the following variables:
USE_JAVA defines if a build
      dependency on the JDK is added.  If
      USE_JAVA is set to “run”, then
      there is only a runtime dependency on the JDK.  The default is
      “yes”, which also adds a build dependency on the
      JDK.
Set USE_JAVA2 to declare that
      a package needs a Java2 implementation.  The supported values
      are “yes”, “1.4”, and
      “1.5”.  “yes” accepts any Java2
      implementation, “1.4” insists on versions 1.4 or
      above, and “1.5” only accepts versions 1.5 or
      above. This variable is not set by default.
PKG_JAVA_HOME is
      automatically set to the runtime location of the used Java
      implementation dependency. It may be used to set
      JAVA_HOME to a good value if the program
      needs this variable to be defined.
      
If a program is written in Go and has any dependencies on
    other Go modules, have the package include
    ../../lang/go/go-module.mk.
Generate a list of those dependencies with make clean && make patch && make show-go-modules > go-modules.mk.
Prepend
      .include "go-modules.mk" to any other
      .includes.
Incorporate these modules in
      distinfo with make
      makesum.
If a program is written in Rust and uses Cargo to build,
    have the package include
    ../../lang/rust/cargo.mk.
Generate a list of those dependencies with make CARGO_ARGS="build --release" build && make print-cargo-depends > cargo-depends.mk.
Prepend
      .include "cargo-depends.mk" to any other
      .includes.
Incorporate these modules in
      distinfo with make
      makesum.
If your package contains interpreted Perl scripts, add
    “perl” to the USE_TOOLS variable
    and set REPLACE_PERL to ensure that the proper
    interpreter path is set. REPLACE_PERL should
    contain a list of scripts, relative to WRKSRC,
    that you want adjusted. Every occurrence of
    */bin/perl in a she-bang line will be
    replaced with the full path to the Perl executable.
If a particular version of Perl is needed, set the
    PERL5_REQD variable to the version number.  The
    default is “5.0”.
See Section 21.6.6, “Packages installing Perl modules” for information about handling Perl modules.
There is also the REPLACE_PERL6 variable
    for the language now known as Raku.
REPLACE_SH,
    REPLACE_BASH, REPLACE_CSH,
    and REPLACE_KSH can be used to replace shell
    she-bangs in files. Please use the appropriate one, preferring
    REPLACE_SH when this shell is sufficient.
    Each should contain a list of scripts, relative to
    WRKSRC, that you want adjusted. Every
    occurrence of the matching shell in a she-bang line will be
    replaced with the full path to the shell executable.
    When using REPLACE_BASH, don't forget to add
    bash to USE_TOOLS.
There are further similar REPLACE variables available, e.g.,
    REPLACE_AWK for packages containing awk scripts,
    and REPLACE_R for R. These two, like the others
    noted above, have their actions defined centrally in
    mk/configure/replace-interpreter.mk. Other
    languages define the actions of these variables within their own
    dedicated part of the tree, e.g., REPLACE_PHP is
    actioned in lang/php/replace.mk, and
    REPLACE_PYTHON is actioned in
    lang/python/application.mk. For other languages,
    consult the mk files found within their specific directories (the
    naming convention varies), or check the list found in
    Appendix E, Help topics.
Currently, special handling for other languages varies
    in pkgsrc.  If a compiler package provides a
    buildlink3.mk file, include that, otherwise
    just add a (build) dependency on the appropriate compiler
    package.
The most common failures when building a package are that some platforms do not provide certain header files, functions or libraries, or they provide the functions in a library that the original package author didn't know. To work around this, you can rewrite the source code in most cases so that it does not use the missing functions or provides a replacement function.
If a package already comes with a GNU configure script, the
	preferred way to fix the build failure is to change the
	configure script, not the code. In the other cases, you can
	utilize the C preprocessor, which defines certain macros
	depending on the operating system and hardware architecture it
	compiles for. These macros can be queried using for example
	#if defined(__i386). Almost every operating
	system, hardware architecture and compiler has its own macro.
	For example, if the macros __GNUC__,
	__i386__ and __NetBSD__
	are all defined, you know that you are using NetBSD on an i386
	compatible CPU, and your compiler is GCC.
The list of the following macros for hardware and
	operating system depends on the compiler that is used. For
	example, if you want to conditionally compile code on Solaris,
	don't use __sun__, as the SunPro compiler
	does not define it. Use __sun instead.
To distinguish between specific NetBSD versions, you should use the following code.
#ifdef __NetBSD__ #include <sys/param.h> #if __NetBSD_Prereq__(9,99,17) /* use a newer feature */ #else /* older code */ #endif #endif #ifndef _WIN32 /* Unix-like specific code */ #endif
To distinguish between 4.4 BSD-derived systems and the rest of the world, you should use the following code.
#include <sys/param.h> #if (defined(BSD) && BSD >= 199306) /* BSD-specific code goes here */ #else /* non-BSD-specific code goes here */ #endif
You can also test for the following macros:
Cygwin __CYGWIN__ DragonFly __DragonFly__ FreeBSD __FreeBSD__ Haiku __HAIKU__ IRIX __sgi (TODO: get a definite source for this) Linux __linux Mac OS X __APPLE__ Minix3 __minix NetBSD __NetBSD__ OpenBSD __OpenBSD__ Solaris sun, __sun
i386 i386, __i386, __i386__ x86-64 __amd64__, __x86_64__ ARM __arm__ MIPS __mips SPARC sparc, __sparc PowerPC __powerpc
Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on combinations of compiler version and architecture and almost always relation to optimisation being enabled. Common symptoms are gcc internal errors or never finishing compiling a file.
Typically, a workaround involves testing the
        MACHINE_ARCH and compiler version, disabling
        optimisation for that combination of file,
	MACHINE_ARCH and compiler.
This used to be a big problem in the past, but is rarely
	needed now as compiler technology has matured. If you still need
	to add a compiler specific workaround, please do so in the file
	hacks.mk and describe the symptom and
	compiler version as detailed as possible.
Compilation sometimes fails with an error message like this:
.../x11/gtk3/work/gtk+-3.24.12/gdk/gdktypes.h:35:10:
    fatal error: pango/pango.h: No such file or directory
The proper way to fix this problem depends on the type of the header, which is described in the following sections.
If the header name looks like it comes from a different package, that other package should be included via the buildlink3 framework.
First, look whether the header is somewhere in the buildlink3
directory below WRKDIR. In the above case of
the missing Pango header:
$ find work/.buildlink/ -print | grep -F pango/pango.h
In the case of Pango, the output is:
work/.buildlink/include/pango-1.0/pango/pango.h
If the pango/pango.h file were placed directly
in the .buildlink directory, it would have been
found automatically. There is an extra pango-1.0
path component though, which means that the compiler command line must
contain an option of the form
-I${BUILDLINK3_PREFIX.pango}/include/pango-1.0. In
most cases this option is generated by the configure script, which can be examined using:
$ $ grep -o '[-]I[^[:space:]]*/pango[^[:space:]]*' work/*/Makefile
-I/usr/pkg/include/pango-1.0
-I/usr/pkg/include/pango-1.0
-I/usr/pkg/include/pango-1.0
-I/usr/pkg/include/pango-1.0
-I/usr/pkg/include/pango-1.0
This looks good. These options are transformed by the buildlink
wrapper to refer to the correct path inside
work/.buildlink.
Since the compilation fails though, examine the compiler command
lines in work/.work.log to see whether the
-I option is included in the particular command
line.
To further analyze the situation, run bmake build-env, which sets up an interactive, realistic environment including all the pkgsrc wrapper commands and environment variables. From there, try to compile some simple example programs that use the header.
If the name of the header seems to come from the package itself,
and if the build is run with parallel jobs, the package may have some
undeclared dependencies between the .c and the
.h files, and a C file is compiled before its
required header is generated.
To see whether the build runs with parallel jobs, run bmake show-all-build | grep JOBS. Its output looks like this:
usr MAKE_JOBS= 7 pkg MAKE_JOBS_SAFE # undefined def _MAKE_JOBS_N= 7
In this case the pkgsrc user has asked pkgsrc to build packages
with 7 jobs in parallel (MAKE_JOBS). The
package could have disabled parallel builds by setting
MAKE_JOBS_SAFE to no, but
in this case it hasn't.
To see whether the build failure is caused by parallel builds, first save the exact error message and a bit of context, maybe you need it later for reporting a bug. Next, run:
MAKE_JOBS_SAFE=no bmake clean build
If that succeeds, file a bug
report against the pkgsrc package, including the exact error
message and the contents of your mk.conf file.
Pkgsrc does not work reliably if any of
LOCALBASE, VARBASE or
WRKDIR contains a symlink. Since 2019Q2, the pkgsrc
bootstrap program prevents installing pkgsrc in symlink-based
directories. Existing pkgsrc installations are not checked for symlinks
though.
The "No such file or directory" error messages are a typical symptom of symlinks, and it's quite difficult to find out that this is the actual cause.
When building a hierarchy of packages, it may happen that one package is built and then pkgsrc is updated. This situation can provoke various hard to diagnose build errors. To clean up the situation:
$ (cd ../../ && cat mk/bsd.pkg.mk >/dev/null && rm -rf */*/work)
(The only purpose of the bsd.pkg.mk is to
prevent running this command in the wrong directory.)
If you have set WRKOBJDIR in mk.conf, remove
that directory as well.
On platforms other than BSD, third-party packages are installed in
/usr/include, together with the base system. This
means that pkgsrc cannot distinguish between headers provided by the base
system (which it needs) and headers from third-party packages (which are
often included in pkgsrc as well). This can lead to subtle version
mismatches.
In pkgsrc installations that have been active for several years, it may happen that some files are manually deleted. To exclude this unlikely reason, run pkg_admin check.
It may help to run pkg_admin rebuild-tree to check/fix dependencies.
If all of the above doesn't help, see Chapter 2, Getting help for contact information. Be prepared to describe what you have tried so far and what any error messages were.
This error message often means that a package did not link to a shared library it needs. The following functions are known to cause this error message over and over.
| Function | Library | Affected platforms | 
|---|---|---|
| accept, bind, connect | -lsocket | Solaris | 
| crypt | -lcrypt | DragonFly, NetBSD | 
| dlopen, dlsym | -ldl | Linux | 
| gethost* | -lnsl | Solaris | 
| inet_aton | -lresolv | Solaris | 
| nanosleep, sem_*, timer_* | -lrt | Solaris | 
| openpty | -lutil | Linux | 
To fix these linker errors, it is often sufficient to add
    LIBS. to the package
    OperatingSystem+=
    -lfooMakefile and then run bmake clean;
    bmake.
When you are using the SunPro compiler, there is another possibility. That compiler cannot handle the following code:
extern int extern_func(int);
static inline int
inline_func(int x)
{
        return extern_func(x);
}
int main(void)
{
        return 0;
}
It generates the code for inline_func even if
that function is never used. This code then refers to
extern_func, which can usually not be resolved. To
solve this problem you can try to tell the package to disable inlining
of functions.
When building for older machine architectures (e.g., i386, PowerPC), builds may fail because the package expects modern 64-bit atomic functions which the underlying hardware either doesn't support, or will only support with specific compiler flags. This is generally handled via inclusion of mk/atomic64.mk.
Sometimes packages fail to build because the compiler runs
    into an operating system specific soft limit.  With the
    UNLIMIT_RESOURCES variable pkgsrc can be told
    to unlimit the resources.  The allowed values are any combination of
    “cputime”,
    “datasize”,
    “memorysize”,
    “stacksize” and
    “virtualsize”.
    Setting this variable is similar to running the shell builtin
    ulimit command to raise the maximum data
    segment size or maximum stack size of a process, respectively, to
    their hard limits.
The BSD-compatible install supplied
    with some operating systems cannot create more than one
    directory at a time. As such, you should call
    ${INSTALL_*_DIR} like this:
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir1
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir2
Instead of running the install commands
    directly, you can also append “dir1
    dir2” to the INSTALLATION_DIRS
    variable, which will automatically do the right thing.
In general, documentation should be installed into
    ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or
    ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME_NOREV} (the latter
    includes the version number of the package).
Many modern packages using GNU autoconf allow to set the
    directory where HTML documentation is installed with the
    “--with-html-dir” option. Sometimes using this flag is
    needed because otherwise the documentation ends up in
    ${PREFIX}/share/doc/html or other places. In
    pkgsrc, the HTML documentation should go into the package-specific
    directory, just like any other documentation.
An exception to the above is that library API documentation
    generated with the textproc/gtk-doc tools, for use by special
    browsers (devhelp) should be left at their default location, which
    is ${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc.  Such
    documentation can be recognized from files ending in
    .devhelp or .devhelp2.
    (It is also acceptable to install such files in
    ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or
    ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME}; the
    .devhelp* file must be directly in that
    directory then, no additional subdirectory level is allowed in
    this case. This is usually achieved by using
    “--with-html-dir=${PREFIX}/share/doc”.
    ${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc is preferred
    though.)
Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install
    a score file that allows all users on the system to record their
    highscores.  In order for this to work, the binaries need to be
    installed setgid and the score files owned by the appropriate
    group and/or owner (traditionally the "games" user/group).  Set
    USE_GAMESGROUP to yes to support this. The
    following variables, documented in more detail in
    mk/defaults/mk.conf, control this
    behaviour: GAMEDATAMODE,
    GAMEDIRMODE, GAMES_GROUP,
    GAMEMODE, GAME_USER.
    Other useful variables are: GAMEDIR_PERMS,
    GAMEDATA_PERMS and
    SETGID_GAMES_PERMS.
An example that illustrates some of the variables described above is
    games/moon-buggy. OWN_DIRS_PERMS is
    used to properly set directory permissions of the directory where the
    scorefile is saved, REQD_FILES_PERMS is used to create a
    dummy scorefile (mbscore) with the proper permissions
    and SPECIAL_PERMS is used to install setgid the game
    binary:
USE_GAMESGROUP=         yes
BUILD_DEFS+=            VARBASE
OWN_DIRS_PERMS+=        ${VARBASE}/games/moon-buggy ${GAMEDIR_PERMS}
REQD_FILES_PERMS+=      /dev/null ${VARBASE}/games/moon-buggy/mbscore ${GAMEDATA_PERMS}
SPECIAL_PERMS+=         ${PREFIX}/bin/moon-buggy ${SETGID_GAMES_PERMS}
Various INSTALL_* variables are also available:
    INSTALL_GAME to install setgid game binaries,
    INSTALL_GAME_DIR to install game directories that are
    needed to be accessed by setgid games and
    INSTALL_GAME_DATA to install scorefiles.
A package should therefore never hard code file ownership or
    access permissions but rely on *_PERMS as described above
    or alternatively on INSTALL_GAME,
    INSTALL_GAME_DATA and
    INSTALL_GAME_DIR to set these correctly.
DESTDIR support means that a package
    installs into a staging directory, not the final location of the
    files. Then a binary package is created which can be used for
    installation as usual. There are two ways: Either the package must
    install as root (“destdir”) or the package can
    install as non-root user (“user-destdir”).
PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT has to be
      set to “destdir” or “user-destdir”.
      By default PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT
      is set to “user-destdir” to help catching more
      potential packaging problems. If bsd.prefs.mk is included in the Makefile,
      PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT needs to be set before
      the inclusion.
All installation operations have to be prefixed with
      ${DESTDIR}.
automake gets this DESTDIR mostly right automatically. Many manual rules and pre/post-install often are incorrect; fix them.
If files are installed with special owner/group
      use SPECIAL_PERMS.
In general, packages should support
      UNPRIVILEGED to be able to use
      DESTDIR.
Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to
      other interpreters besides (or as well as) Perl.  To correct the
      full pathname to the script interpreter, you need to set the
      following definitions in your Makefile (we
    shall use tclsh in this example):
REPLACE_INTERPRETER+=   tcl
REPLACE.tcl.old=        .*/bin/tclsh
REPLACE.tcl.new=        ${PREFIX}/bin/tclsh
REPLACE_FILES.tcl=      # list of tcl scripts which need to be fixed,
# relative to ${WRKSRC}, just as in REPLACE_PERL
Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include
    the Makefile fragment
    ../../lang/perl5/module.mk.  It provides a
    do-configure target for the standard perl
    configuration for such modules as well as various hooks to tune
    this configuration.  See comments in this file for
    details.
Perl5 modules will install into different places depending
    on the version of perl used during the build process.  To
    address this, pkgsrc will append lines to the
    PLIST corresponding to the files listed in
    the installed .packlist file generated by
    most perl5 modules.  This is invoked by defining
    PERL5_PACKLIST to a space-separated list of
    packlist files relative to PERL5_PACKLIST_DIR
    (PERL5_INSTALLVENDORARCH by default),
    e.g.:
PERL5_PACKLIST= auto/Pg/.packlist
The perl5 config variables
    installarchlib,
    installscript,
    installvendorbin,
    installvendorscript,
    installvendorarch,
    installvendorlib,
    installvendorman1dir, and
    installvendorman3dir represent those
    locations in which components of perl5 modules may be installed,
    provided as variable with uppercase and prefixed with
    PERL5_, e.g. PERL5_INSTALLARCHLIB
    and may be used by perl5 packages that don't have a packlist.
    These variables are also substituted for in the
    PLIST as uppercase prefixed with
    PERL5_SUB_.
Some packages, usually those providing libraries, install
    pkg-config files so that their headers and libraries can easily be
    found.  The file names end with .pc.
Most of the time, these files only provide the linker flags
    for the library, but do not include the flags for setting the
    rpath so the libraries can also be found at runtime. Since this is
    so common, pkgsrc provides PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE
    for this. Many packages generate the .pc from
    .pc.in, in that case add those files to the
    PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE variable:
PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE+=   foo.pc.in
    
For packages using meson, the files are generated during build and you also need to change the phase in which the replacement is done. For example:
PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE+=            output/meson-private/foo.pc
PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE_STAGE=       post-build
    
Some packages install info files or use the
    “makeinfo”  or “install-info”
    commands.  INFO_FILES should be defined in
    the package Makefile so that INSTALL and
    DEINSTALL scripts will be generated to
    handle registration of the info files in the Info directory
    file. The “install-info” command used for the info
    files registration is either provided by the system, or by a
    special purpose package automatically added as dependency if
    needed.
PKGINFODIR is the directory under
    ${PREFIX} where info files are primarily
    located. PKGINFODIR defaults to
    “info” and can be overridden by the user.
The info files for the package should be listed in the
    package PLIST; however any split info files
    need not be listed.
A package which needs the “makeinfo” command
    at build time must add “makeinfo” to
    USE_TOOLS in its Makefile. If a minimum
    version of the “makeinfo” command is needed it
    should be noted with the TEXINFO_REQD
    variable in the package Makefile. By
    default, a minimum version of 3.12 is required. If the system
    does not provide a makeinfo command or if it
    does not match the required minimum, a build dependency on the
    devel/gtexinfo package will
    be added automatically.
The build and installation process of the software provided
    by the package should not use the
    install-info command as the registration of
    info files is the task of the package
    INSTALL script, and it must use the
    appropriate makeinfo command.
To achieve this goal, the pkgsrc infrastructure creates
    overriding scripts for the install-info and
    makeinfo commands in a directory listed early
    in PATH.
The script overriding install-info has
    no effect except the logging of a message. The script overriding
    makeinfo logs a message and according to the
    value of TEXINFO_REQD either runs the appropriate
    makeinfo command or exit on error.
All packages that install manual pages should install them
    into the same directory, so that there is one common place to look
    for them. In pkgsrc, this place is
    ${PREFIX}/${PKGMANDIR}, and this expression
    should be used in packages. The default for
    PKGMANDIR is
    “man”. Another often-used value
    is “share/man”.
The support for a custom PKGMANDIR
    is far from complete.
The PLIST files can just use
    man/ as the top level directory for the man
    page file entries, and the pkgsrc framework will convert as
    needed. In all other places, the correct
    PKGMANDIR must be used.
Packages that are
    configured with GNU_CONFIGURE set as
    “yes”, by default will use the
    ./configure
    --mandir switch to set where the man pages should be installed.
    The path is GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR which defaults
    to ${PREFIX}/${PKGMANDIR}.
Packages that use GNU_CONFIGURE but do not
    use --mandir, can set CONFIGURE_HAS_MANDIR
    to “no”.
    Or if the ./configure script uses
    a non-standard use of --mandir, you can set
    GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR as needed.
See Section 19.5, “Man page compression” for information on installation of compressed manual pages.
If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild the fonts database in the directory where they get installed at installation and deinstallation time. This can be automatically done by using the pkginstall framework.
You can list the directories where fonts are installed in the
    FONTS_DIRS.
    variables, where typetype can be one of
    “ttf”, “type1” or “x11”.
    Also make sure that the database file
    fonts.dir is not listed in the PLIST.
Note that you should not create new directories for fonts; instead use the standard ones to avoid that the user needs to manually configure his X server to find them.
If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be registered in system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs, etc.), you need to take some extra steps:
Include
	../../textproc/xmlcatmgr/catalogs.mk in
	your Makefile, which takes care of
	registering those files in system-wide catalogs at
	installation and deinstallation time.
Set SGML_CATALOGS to the full path of
	any SGML catalogs installed by the package.
Set XML_CATALOGS to the full path of
	any XML catalogs installed by the package.
Set SGML_ENTRIES to individual entries
	to be added to the SGML catalog.  These come in groups of
	three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more information
	(specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action).
	Note that you will normally not use this variable.
Set XML_ENTRIES to individual entries
	to be added to the XML catalog.  These come in groups of three
	strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more information (specifically,
	arguments recognized by the 'add' action).  Note that you will
	normally not use this variable.
If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by
    installing .xml files inside
    ${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages, you
    need to take some extra steps to ensure that the database is kept
    consistent with respect to these new files:
Include
	../../databases/shared-mime-info/mimedb.mk
	(avoid using the buildlink3.mk file from
	this same directory, which is reserved for inclusion from
	other buildlink3.mk files).  It takes
	care of rebuilding the MIME database at installation and
	deinstallation time, and disallows any access to it directly
	from the package.
Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the
	share/mime directory,
	except for files saved under
	share/mime/packages.  The former are
	handled automatically by
	the update-mime-database program, but the latter are
	package-dependent and must be removed by the package that
	installed them in the first place.
Remove any share/mime/* directories
	from the PLIST.  They will be handled by the shared-mime-info
	package.
If a package uses intltool during its build, add
    intltool to the USE_TOOLS,
    which forces it to use the intltool package provided by pkgsrc,
    instead of the one bundled with the distribution file.
This tracks intltool's build-time dependencies and uses the latest available version; this way, the package benefits of any bug fixes that may have appeared since it was released.
If a package contains an rc.d script, it won't be copied into
    the startup directory (/etc/rc.d) by default,
    but you can enable copying by setting the option
    PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES in
    mk.conf.  With PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES, rc.d scripts
    will be copied into /etc/rc.d when a package
    is installed, but only if the target does not already exist.
    Copies in /etc/rc.d will be automatically removed
    only if they have not been modified.
    
Note that this alone does not enable the service: It must still be
    added to /etc/rc.conf.
If a package installs TeX packages into the texmf tree,
    the ls-R database of the tree needs to be
    updated.
Except the main TeX packages such as kpathsea,
    packages should install files
    into ${PREFIX}/share/texmf-dist,
    not ${PREFIX}/share/texmf.
Include
      ../../print/kpathsea/texmf.mk.  This
      takes care of rebuilding the ls-R
      database at installation and deinstallation time.
If your package installs files into a texmf
      tree other than the one
      at ${PREFIX}/share/texmf-dist,
      set TEX_TEXMF_DIRS to the list of all texmf
      trees that need database update.
If your package also installs font map files that need
      to be registered using updmap,
      include ../../print/tex-tetex/map.mk and
      set TEX_MAP_FILES and/or
      TEX_MIXEDMAP_FILES to the list of all
      such font map files.  Then updmap will
      be run automatically at installation/deinstallation to
      enable/disable font map files for TeX output
      drivers.
Make sure that none of ls-R
      databases are included in PLIST, as
      they will be removed only by the kpathsea package.
There are some packages that provide libraries and executables for running binaries from a one operating system on a different one (if the latter supports it). One example is running Linux binaries on NetBSD.
The pkgtools/rpm2pkg
    helps in extracting and packaging Linux rpm packages.
The CHECK_SHLIBS can be set to no to
    avoid the check-shlibs target, which tests
    if all libraries for each installed executable can be found by
    the dynamic linker.  Since the standard dynamic linker is run,
    this fails for emulation packages, because the libraries used
    by the emulation are not in the standard directories.
If a package installs images under the
    share/icons/hicolor and/or updates the
    share/icons/hicolor/icon-theme.cache
    database, you need to take some extra steps to make sure that the
    shared theme directory is handled appropriately and that the cache
    database is rebuilt:
Include
	../../graphics/hicolor-icon-theme/buildlink3.mk.
Check the PLIST and remove the
	entry that refers to the theme cache.
Ensure that the PLIST does not remove the shared icon
	  directories from the share/icons/hicolor
	  hierarchy because they will be handled automatically.
The best way to verify that the PLIST is correct with respect to the last two points is to regenerate it using make print-PLIST.
If a package installs .desktop files
      under share/applications and these include
      MIME information (MimeType key), you need to take extra steps to
      ensure that they are registered into the MIME database:
Include
	  ../../sysutils/desktop-file-utils/desktopdb.mk.
Check the PLIST and remove the entry that refers to the
	  share/applications/mimeinfo.cache file.
	  It will be handled automatically.
The best way to verify that the PLIST is correct with respect to the last point is to regenerate it using make print-PLIST.
In some cases one does not have the time to solve a problem
  immediately. In this case, one can plainly mark a package as broken.  For
  this, one just sets the variable BROKEN to the
  reason why the package is broken (similar to the
  PKG_FAIL_REASON variable).  A user trying to build
  the package will immediately be shown this message, and the build
  will not be even tried.
BROKEN packages are removed from pkgsrc in irregular
  intervals.
Table of Contents
Quoting GNOME's web site:
The GNOME project provides two things: The GNOME desktop environment, an intuitive and attractive desktop for users, and the GNOME development platform, an extensive framework for building applications that integrate into the rest of the desktop.
pkgsrc provides a seamless way to automatically build and install a complete GNOME environment under many different platforms. We can say with confidence that pkgsrc is one of the most advanced build and packaging systems for GNOME due to its included technologies buildlink3, the wrappers and tools framework and automatic configuration file management. Lots of efforts are put into achieving a completely clean deinstallation of installed software components.
Given that pkgsrc is NetBSD's official packaging system, the above also means that great efforts are put into making GNOME work under this operating system.
This chapter is aimed at pkgsrc developers and other people interested in helping our GNOME porting and packaging efforts. It provides instructions on how to manage the existing packages and some important information regarding their internals.
pkgsrc includes three GNOME-related meta packages:
meta-pkgs/gnome-base: Provides
    the core GNOME desktop environment.  It only includes the necessary
    bits to get it to boot correctly, although it may lack important
    functionality for daily operation.  The idea behind this package is
    to let end users build their own configurations on top of this one,
    first installing this meta package to achieve a functional setup and
    then adding individual applications.
meta-pkgs/gnome: Provides a
    complete installation of the GNOME platform and desktop as defined
    by the GNOME project; this is based on the components distributed in
    the platform/x.y/x.y.z/sources and
    desktop/x.y/x.y.z/sources directories of the
    official FTP server.  Developer-only tools found in those
    directories are not installed unless required by some other
    component to work properly.  Similarly, packages from the bindings
    set (bindings/x.y/x.y.z/sources) are not pulled
    in unless required as a dependency for an end-user component.  This
    package "extends" meta-pkgs/gnome-base.
meta-pkgs/gnome-devel:
    Installs all the tools required to build a GNOME component when
    fetched from the CVS repository.  These are required to let the
    autogen.sh scripts work appropriately.
In all these packages, the DEPENDS lines are
sorted in a way that eases updates: a package may depend on other
packages listed before it but not on any listed after it.  It is very
important to keep this order to ease updates so... do not
change it to alphabetical sorting!
Almost all GNOME applications are written in C and use a common set of tools as their build system. Things get different with the new bindings to other languages (such as Python), but the following will give you a general idea on the minimum required tools:
Almost all GNOME applications use the GNU Autotools as their build system. As a general rule you will need to tell this to your package:
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes USE_LIBTOOL= yes USE_TOOLS+= gmake
If the package uses pkg-config to detect dependencies, add this tool to the list of required utilities:
USE_TOOLS+= pkg-config
Also use pkgtools/verifypc at
    the end of the build process to ensure that you did not miss to
    specify any dependency in your package and that the version
    requirements are all correct.
If the package uses intltool, be sure to add
    intltool to the USE_TOOLS
    to handle dependencies and to force the package to use the latest
    available version.
If the package uses gtk-doc (a documentation generation utility), do not add a dependency on it. The tool is rather big and the distfile should come with pregenerated documentation anyway; if it does not, it is a bug that you ought to report. For such packages you should disable gtk-doc (unless it is the default):
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-gtk-doc
The default location of installed HTML files
    (share/gtk-doc/<package-name>) is correct
    and should not be changed unless the package insists on installing
    them somewhere else.  Otherwise programs as
    devhelp will not be able to open them.  You can
    do that with an entry similar to:
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        --with-html-dir=${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc/...
GNOME uses multiple shared directories and
files under the installation prefix to maintain databases.  In this
context, shared means that those exact same directories and files are
used among several different packages, leading to conflicts in the
PLIST.  pkgsrc currently includes functionality to
handle the most common cases, so you have to forget about using
@unexec ${RMDIR} lines in your file lists and
omitting shared files from them.  If you find yourself doing those,
your package is most likely incorrect.
The following table lists the common situations that result in using shared directories or files. For each of them, the appropriate solution is given. After applying the solution be sure to regenerate the package's file list with make print-PLIST and ensure it is correct.
Table 22.1. PLIST handling for GNOME packages
| If the package... | Then... | 
|---|---|
| Installs icons under the share/icons/hicolorhierarchy or updatesshare/icons/hicolor/icon-theme.cache. | See Section 21.6.17, “Packages installing hicolor icons”. | 
| Installs files under share/mime/packages. | See Section 21.6.12, “Packages installing extensions to the MIME database”. | 
| Installs .desktopfiles undershare/applicationsand these include MIME
        information. | See Section 21.6.18, “Packages installing desktop files”. | 
When seeing GNOME as a whole, there are two kinds of updates:
Given that there is still a very long way for GNOME 3 (if it
      ever appears), we consider a major update one that goes from a
      2.X version to a 2.Y one,
      where Y is even and greater than
      X.  These are hard to achieve because they
      introduce lots of changes in the components' code and almost all
      GNOME distfiles are updated to newer versions.  Some of them can
      even break API and ABI compatibility with the previous major
      version series.  As a result, the update needs to be done all at
      once to minimize breakage.
A major update typically consists of around 80 package updates and the addition of some new ones.
We consider a minor update one that goes from a
      2.A.X version to a 2.A.Y
      one where Y is greater than
      X.  These are easy to achieve because they do
      not update all GNOME components, can be done in an incremental way
      and do not break API nor ABI compatibility.
A minor update typically consists of around 50 package updates, although the numbers here may vary a lot.
In order to update the GNOME components in pkgsrc to a new stable release (either major or minor), the following steps should be followed:
Get a list of all the tarballs that form the new release by
    using the following commands.  These will leave the full list of the
    components' distfiles into the list.txt
    file:
%echo ls "*.tar.bz2" | \ ftp -V ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/platform/x.y/x.y.z/sources/ | \ awk '{ print $9 }' >list.txt%echo ls "*.tar.bz2" | \ ftp -V ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/desktop/x.y/x.y.z/sources/ | \ awk '{ print $9 }' >>list.txt
Open each meta package's Makefile and
    bump their version to the release you are updating them to.  The
    three meta packages should be always consistent with versioning.
    Obviously remove any PKGREVISIONs that might be
    in them.
For each meta package, update all its
    DEPENDS lines to match the latest versions as
    shown by the above commands.  Do not list any
    newer version (even if found in the FTP) because the meta packages
    are supposed to list the exact versions that form a specific GNOME
    release.  Exceptions are permitted here if a newer version solves a
    serious issue in the overall desktop experience; these typically
    come in the form of a revision bump in pkgsrc, not in newer versions
    from the developers.
Packages not listed in the list.txt file
    should be updated to the latest version available (if found in
    pkgsrc).  This is the case, for example, of the dependencies on the
    GNU Autotools in the meta-pkgs/gnome-devel meta package.
Generate a patch from the modified meta packages and extract the list of "new" lines. This will provide you an outline on what packages need to be updated in pkgsrc and in what order:
%cvs diff -u gnome-devel gnome-base gnome | grep '^+D' >todo.txt
For major desktop updates it is recommended to zap all your installed packages and start over from scratch at this point.
Now comes the longest step by far: iterate over the contents
    of todo.txt and update the packages listed in
    it in order.  For major desktop updates none of these should be
    committed until the entire set is completed because there are chances
    of breaking not-yet-updated packages.
Once the packages are up to date and working, commit them to
    the tree one by one with appropriate log messages.  At the end,
    commit the three meta package updates and all the corresponding
    changes to the doc/CHANGES-<YEAR> and
    pkgsrc/doc/TODO files.
GNOME is a very big component in pkgsrc which approaches 100 packages. Please, it is very important that you always, always, always feed back any portability fixes you do to a GNOME package to the mainstream developers (see Section 12.3.5, “Feedback to the author”). This is the only way to get their attention on portability issues and to ensure that future versions can be built out-of-the box on NetBSD. The less custom patches in pkgsrc, the easier further updates are. Those developers in charge of issuing major GNOME updates will be grateful if you do that.
The most common places to report bugs are the GNOME's GitLab and the freedesktop.org's GitLab. Not all components use these to track bugs, but most of them do. Do not be short on your reports: always provide detailed explanations of the current failure, how it can be improved to achieve maximum portability and, if at all possible, provide a patch against the main Git branch. The more verbose you are, the higher chances of your patch being accepted.
Also, please avoid using preprocessor magic to fix portability
issues.  While the FreeBSD GNOME people are doing a great job in porting
GNOME to their operating system, the official GNOME sources are now
plagued by conditionals that check for __FreeBSD__
and similar macros.  This hurts portability.  Please see our patching
guidelines (Section 12.3.4, “Patching guidelines”) for more
details.
Table of Contents
Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc developers to guarantee that the packages don't contain any trojan horses etc. This is not to annoy anyone but rather to protect our users! You're still free to put up your home-made binary packages and tell the world where to get them. NetBSD developers doing bulk builds and wanting to upload them please see Chapter 8, Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds).
Firstly, you can import new packages into pkgsrc-wip (“pkgsrc work-in-progress”); see the homepage at https://pkgsrc.org/wip/ for details.
Next, check that your package is complete, compiles and
	runs well; see Chapter 14, Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch and the rest of this
	document. Run the pkgtools/pkglint
	tool and fix any errors that appear.
Finally, send a report to the pkgsrc bug tracking system,
	either with the send-pr(1) command, or if you don't have
	that, go to the web page
	https://www.NetBSD.org/support/send-pr.html,
	which contains some instructions and a link to a form where you
	can submit packages.  The
	sysutils/gtk-send-pr package is
	also available as a substitute for either of the above two tools.
	
In the form of the problem report, the category should be “pkg”, the synopsis should include the package name and version number, and the description field should contain a short description of your package (contents of the COMMENT variable or DESCR file are OK).
Please note all package additions, updates, moves, and
	removals in pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES-. It's very
	important to keep this file up to date and conforming to the
	existing format, because it will be used by scripts to
	automatically update pages on www.NetBSD.org and other
	sites. Additionally, check the
	YYYYpkgsrc/doc/TODO file and remove the entry
	for the package you updated or removed, in case it was mentioned
	there.
When the PKGREVISION of a package is
	bumped, the change should appear in
	pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES- if it is security
	related or otherwise relevant. Mass bumps that result from a
	dependency being updated should not be mentioned. In all other
	cases it's the developer's decision.YYYY
There is a make target that helps in creating proper
  CHANGES- entries:  make
  changes-entry. It uses the optional YYYYCTYPE
  and NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME variables. The general
  usage is to first make sure that your CHANGES-
  file is up-to-date (to avoid having to resolve conflicts later-on)
  and then to cd to the package directory.  For
  package updates, make changes-entry is enough.
  For new packages, or package moves or removals, set the
  YYYYCTYPE variable on the command line to "Added",
  "Moved", or "Removed".  You can set NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME
  in mk.conf if your local login name is
  not the same as your NetBSD login name. The target also automatically
  removes possibly existing entries for the package in the
  TODO file. Don't forget to commit
  the changes, e.g. by using make commit-changes-entry!
  If you are not using a checkout directly from cvs.NetBSD.org, but e.g.
  a local copy of the repository, you can set USE_NETBSD_REPO=yes. This
  makes the cvs commands use the main repository.
  
For several years, there have been mirrors of pkgsrc in fossil, git, and hg. Standard practice when using these tools is to make the first line of a commit message function as a summary that can be read without the rest, such as is commonly done with "git log --oneline". For this reason, we have the following guidelines for pkgsrc commit messages:
Start the commit message with a line that explains the big picture in 65 characters or less. When a commit is for one package, include the name of the package. For updates, include the version to which it is updated.
Leave the next line empty.
Then come the details for the commit (changes in that package, reason for a change) and any relevant PRs. Wrap this section.
Here is an example:
libxslt: update to 1.0.30 Changes since 1.0.29: ...
Here is another example:
mk/bsd.pkg.mk: enable SSP by default on NetBSD (rationale)
Commit messages are final: no “cvs admin” is allowed on the pkgsrc repository to change commit messages.
This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write access to the pkgsrc repository.
When the package is finished, “cvs add” the files.
Start by adding the directory and then files in the directory. Don't
forget to add the new package to the category's
Makefile. Make sure you don't forget any files;
you can check by running “cvs status”. An example:
$cd .../pkgsrc/category$cvs add pkgname$cd pkgname$cvs add DESCR Makefile PLIST distinfo buildlink3.mk patches$cvs add patches/p*$cvs status | less$cvs commit$cd ..$vi Makefile # add SUBDIR+=pkgname line$cvs commit Makefile$cd pkgname$make CTYPE=Added commit-changes-entry
The commit message of the initial import should include part of the
  DESCR file, so people reading the mailing lists know
  what the package is/does.
Also mention the new package in
pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES-20xx.
Previously, “cvs import” was suggested, but it was much easier to get wrong than “cvs add”.
Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the changes between old and new versions into the commit log when updating a package. There are various reasons for this:
A URL is volatile, and can change over time. It may go away completely or its information may be overwritten by newer information.
Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS repository is very useful for people who use either cvs or anoncvs.
Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS repository is very useful for people who read the pkgsrc-changes mailing list, so that they can make tactical decisions about when to upgrade the package.
Please also recognize that, just because a new version of a package has been released, it should not automatically be upgraded in the CVS repository. We prefer to be conservative in the packages that are included in pkgsrc - development or beta packages are not really the best thing for most places in which pkgsrc is used. Please use your judgement about what should go into pkgsrc, and bear in mind that stability is to be preferred above new and possibly untested features.
Renaming packages is not recommended.
When renaming packages, be sure to fix any references to the old name in other Makefiles, options, buildlink files, etc.
  Also, when renaming a package, please add
  the package name and version pattern(s) of the previous package
  to SUPERSEDES.
  This may be repeated for multiple renames.
  The new package would be an exact replacement.
  Example:
SUPERSEDES+= p5-IO-Compress-Zlib<2.017 SUPERSEDES+= optcomp-[0-9]*
Note that “successor” in the
  CHANGES-YYYY file doesn't necessarily
  mean that it supersedes, as that successor may
  not be an exact replacement but is a suggestion for the replaced
  functionality.
It is preferred that packages are not renamed or moved, but if needed please follow these steps.
Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.
Remove all CVS dirs.
Alternatively to the first two steps you can also do:
%cvs -d user@cvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot export -D today pkgsrc/category/package
and use that for further work.
Fix CATEGORIES and any
DEPENDS paths that just did “../package”
instead of “../../category/package”.
In the modified package's Makefile, consider setting
PREV_PKGPATH to the previous category/package
pathname.  The PREV_PKGPATH can be used by tools
for doing an update using pkgsrc building; for example, it can
search the pkg_summary(5) database for PREV_PKGPATH
(if no SUPERSEDES) and then use the corresponding
new PKGPATH for that moved package.  Note that
it may have multiple matches, so the tool should also check on the
PKGBASE too.  The PREV_PKGPATH
probably has no value unless SUPERSEDES is not
set, i.e.  PKGBASE stays the same.  
cvs add the modified package in the new place.
Check if any package depends on it:
%cd /usr/pkgsrc%grep /package */*/Makefile* */*/buildlink*
Fix paths in packages from step 5 to point to new location.
cvs rm (-f) the package at the old location.
Remove from oldcategory/Makefile.
Add to newcategory/Makefile.
Commit the changed and removed files:
%cvs commit oldcategory/package oldcategory/Makefile newcategory/Makefile
(and any packages from step 5, of course).
Table of Contents
In the past, some packages have caused more package failures than others, and we'd like to reduce this in the future.
For this reason, pkgsrc-pmc marks some packages with POLICY_UPDATE_LIMITED. The possible values currently are:
abi for packages where ABI/API changes often broke the packages depending on them
bootstrap for packages that are used during the pkgsrc bootstrap
pkglint will warn when committing updates to these packages.
Before committing non-micro version updates to packages marked
  with POLICY_UPDATE_LIMITED=abi, a limited bulk
  build of meta-pkgs/bulk-test-${PACKAGE} needs to be run
  and the result posted to the tech-pkg mailing list, highlighting
  what packages would stop building (if any).
Depending on the result, pkgsrc-pmc then decides:
go ahead with the update
wait for packages X, Y, Z to be fixed (upstream or locally) with the updated version, which is put in wip in the meantime
In the second case, all pkgsrc developers are encouraged to work on fixing this - it is not only the updater's task to fix them.
The decision to wait for packages can be revisited.
When updating packages used in the bootstrap, i.e. marked with
  POLICY_UPDATE_LIMITED=bootstrap, test the
  bootstrap process and preferably some basic packages and send the
  patch to the tech-pkg mailing list so it can be tested on other
  platforms as well. Give at least two weeks for feedback and testing
  by others.
This section contains the answers to questions that may
	arise when you are writing a package. If you don't find your
	question answered here, first have a look in the other chapters,
	and if you still don't have the answer, ask on the
	pkgsrc-users mailing list.
| 25.1. | What is the difference between
	 | 
| 
 
 
 | |
| 25.2. | What is the difference between
	 | 
| 
 
 
 | |
| 25.3. | What is the difference between
	 | 
| 
 
 
 | |
| 25.4. | Why does make show-var
	VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX. | 
| For optimization reasons, some variables are only available in the “wrapper” phase and later. To “simulate” the wrapper phase, append PKG_PHASE=wrapper to the above command. | |
| 25.5. | What does
	 | 
| The  | |
| 25.6. | Which mailing lists are there for package developers? | 
| 
 | |
| 25.7. | Where is the pkgsrc documentation? | 
| There are many places where you can find documentation about pkgsrc: 
 | |
| 25.8. | I have a little time to kill. What shall I do? | 
| This is not really an FAQ yet, but here's the answer anyway. 
 | 
This part of the guide deals with everything from the infrastructure that is behind the interfaces described in the developer's guide. A casual package maintainer should not need anything from this part.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of many small Makefile fragments. Each such fragment needs a properly specified interface. This chapter explains how such an interface looks like.
Whenever a variable is defined in the pkgsrc infrastructure, the location and the way of definition provide much information about the intended use of that variable. Additionally, more documentation may be found in a header comment or in this pkgsrc guide.
A special file is
	mk/defaults/mk.conf, which lists all
	variables that are intended to be user-defined. They are either
	defined using the ?= operator or they are
	left undefined because defining them to anything would
	effectively mean “yes”. All these variables may be
	overridden by the pkgsrc user in the MAKECONF
	file.
Outside this file, the following conventions apply:
	Variables that are defined using the ?=
	operator may be overridden by a package.
Variables that are defined using the =
	operator may be used read-only at run-time.
Variables whose name starts with an underscore must not be accessed outside the pkgsrc infrastructure at all. They may change without further notice.
These conventions are currently not applied consistently to the complete pkgsrc infrastructure.
All variables that contain lists of things should default
	to being empty. Two examples that do not follow this rule are
	USE_LANGUAGES and
	DISTFILES. These variables cannot simply be
	modified using the += operator in package
	Makefiles (or other files included by
	them), since there is no guarantee whether the variable is
	already set or not, and what its value is. In the case of
	DISTFILES, the packages “know”
	the default value and just define it as in the following
	example.
DISTFILES=      ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} additional-files.tar.gz
Because of the selection of this default value, the same
	value appears in many package Makefiles. Similarly for
	USE_LANGUAGES, but in this case the default
	value (“c”) is so short that it
	doesn't stand out. Nevertheless it is mentioned in many
	files.
Variable evaluation takes place either at load time or at runtime, depending on the context in which they occur. The contexts where variables are evaluated at load time are:
The right hand side of the :=
	and != operators,
Make directives like .if or
	.for,
Dependency lines.
A special exception are references to the iteration
	variables of .for loops, which are expanded
	inline, no matter in which context they appear.
As the values of variables may change during load time,
	care must be taken not to evaluate them by accident. Typical
	examples for variables that should not be evaluated at load time
	are DEPENDS and
	CONFIGURE_ARGS. To make the effect more
	clear, here is an example:
CONFIGURE_ARGS=         # none
CFLAGS=                 -O
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        CFLAGS=${CFLAGS:Q}
CONFIGURE_ARGS:=        ${CONFIGURE_ARGS}
CFLAGS+=                -Wall
This code shows how the use of the :=
	operator can quickly lead to unexpected results. The first
	paragraph is fairly common code. The second paragraph evaluates
	the CONFIGURE_ARGS variable, which results in
	CFLAGS=-O. In the third paragraph, the
	-Wall is appended to the
	CFLAGS, but this addition will not appear in
	CONFIGURE_ARGS. In actual code, the three
	paragraphs from above typically occur in completely unrelated
	files.
There are many ways in which the definition and use of a
	variable can be restricted in order to detect bugs and violations
	of the (mostly unwritten) policies. A package can be checked with
	pkglint -Wall to see whether it meets these
	rules.
Most of the .mk files fall into one
	of the following classes. Cases where a file falls into more
	than one class should be avoided as it often leads to subtle
	bugs.
In a traditional imperative programming language some of
	the .mk files could be described as
	procedures. They take some input parameters and—after
	inclusion—provide a result in output parameters. Since all
	variables in Makefiles have global scope
	care must be taken not to use parameter names that have already
	another meaning. For example, PKGNAME is a
	bad choice for a parameter name.
Procedures are completely evaluated at preprocessing time.
	That is, when calling a procedure all input parameters must be
	completely resolvable. For example,
	CONFIGURE_ARGS should never be an input
	parameter since it is very likely that further text will be
	added after calling the procedure, which would effectively apply
	the procedure to only a part of the variable. Also, references
	to other variables will be modified after calling the
	procedure.
A procedure can declare its output parameters either as suitable for use in preprocessing directives or as only available at runtime. The latter alternative is for variables that contain references to other runtime variables.
Procedures shall be written such that it is possible to call the procedure more than once. That is, the file must not contain multiple-inclusion guards.
Examples for procedures are
	mk/bsd.options.mk and
	mk/buildlink3/bsd.builtin.mk. To express
	that the parameters are evaluated at load time, they should be
	assigned using the := operator, which should
	be used only for this purpose.
Action files take some input parameters and may define runtime variables. They shall not define loadtime variables. There are action files that are included implicitly by the pkgsrc infrastructure, while other must be included explicitly.
An example for action files is
	mk/subst.mk.
Package Makefiles usually consist of
	a set of variable definitions, and include the file
	../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk in the very last line.
	Before that, they may also include various other
	*.mk files if they need to query the
	availability of certain features like the type of compiler or
	the X11 implementation. Due to the heavy use of preprocessor
	directives like .if and
	.for, the order in which the files are loaded
	matters.
This section describes at which point the various files are loaded and gives reasons for that order.
The very first action in bsd.prefs.mk
	is to define some essential variables like
	OPSYS, OS_VERSION and
	MACHINE_ARCH.
Then, the user settings are loaded from the file specified
	in MAKECONF, which is usually mk.conf.
	After that, those variables
	that have not been overridden by the user are loaded from
	mk/defaults/mk.conf.
After the user settings, the system settings and platform settings are loaded, which may override the user settings.
Then, the tool definitions are loaded. The tool wrappers are not yet in effect. This only happens when building a package, so the proper variables must be used instead of the direct tool names.
As the last steps, some essential variables from the wrapper and the package system flavor are loaded, as well as the variables that have been cached in earlier phases of a package build.
First, bsd.prefs.mk is loaded.
Then, the various *-vars.mk files are
	loaded, which fill default values for those variables that have
	not been defined by the package. These variables may later
	be used even in unrelated files.
Then, the file bsd.pkg.error.mk
	provides the target error-check that is added
	as a special dependency to all other targets that use
	DELAYED_ERROR_MSG or
	DELAYED_WARNING_MSG.
Then, the package-specific hacks from
	hacks.mk are included.
Then, various other files follow. Most of them don't have any dependencies on what they need to have included before or after them, though some do.
The code to check PKG_FAIL_REASON and
	PKG_SKIP_REASON is then executed, which
	restricts the use of these variables to all the files that have
	been included before. Appearances in later files will be
	silently ignored.
Then, the files for the main targets are included, in the order of later execution, though the actual order should not matter.
At last, some more files are included that don't set any interesting variables but rather just define make targets to be executed.
Table of Contents
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of a large codebase, and there are many corners where every little bit of a file is well thought out, making pkgsrc likely to fail as soon as anything is changed near those parts. To prevent most changes from breaking anything, a suite of regression tests should go along with every important part of the pkgsrc infrastructure. This chapter describes how regression tests work in pkgsrc and how you can add new tests.
You first need to install the pkgtools/pkg_regress package, which
	provides the pkg_regress command. Then you
	can simply run that command, which will run all tests in the
	regress/ directory.
Every directory in the regress/
	directory that contains a file called spec
	is considered a regression test. This file is a shell program
	that is included by the pkg_regress command.
	The following functions can be overridden to suit your
	needs.
These functions do not take any parameters. Although they are called in “set -e” mode, they don't stop at the first failing command. See this Stack Overflow question for details.
do_setupThis function prepares the environment for the test. By default it does nothing.
do_testThis function runs the actual test. By default,
	it calls TEST_MAKE with the arguments
	MAKEARGS_TEST and writes its output including
	error messages into the file
	TEST_OUTFILE.
When defining this function, make sure that all output that needs to be checked is written to the correct output file. Example:
do_test() {
        echo "Example output"
} 1>$TEST_OUTFILE 2>&1
check_resultThis function is run after the test and is typically used to compare the actual output from the one that is expected. It can make use of the various helper functions from the next section. Example:
check_result() {
        exit_status 0
        output_require "Example"
        output_require "^[[:alpha:]+[[:space:]][[:alpha:]]{6}$"
        output_prohibit "no such file or directory"
        regress_fail "expected $expected but got $actual for input $input"
}
do_cleanupThis function cleans everything up after the test has been run. By default it does nothing.
regress_fail message...This function makes the test fail with the given error message.
exit_status expectedThis function compares the exitcode of the do_test function with its first parameter. If they differ, the test will fail.
output_require regex...This function checks for each of its parameters if the output from do_test matches the extended regular expression. If it does not, the test will fail. Example:
output_require "looks fine"
output_require "^[[:alpha:]+[[:space:]][[:alpha:]]{6}$"
output_prohibit regex...This function checks for each of its parameters if the output from do_test() does not match the extended regular expression. If any of the regular expressions matches, the test will fail.
Table of Contents
The pkgsrc system has already been ported to many operating systems, hardware architectures and compilers. This chapter explains the necessary steps to make pkgsrc even more portable.
To port pkgsrc to a new operating system (called
	MyOS in this example), you need to touch the
	following files:
pkgtools/bootstrap-mk-files/files/mods/MyOS.sys.mkThis file contains some basic definitions, for example the name of the C compiler.
mk/bsd.prefs.mkInsert code that defines the variables
	OPSYS, OS_VERSION,
	OPSYS_VERSION, LOWER_VENDOR,
	MACHINE_ARCH, OBJECT_FMT,
	APPEND_ELF, and the other variables that
	appear in this file.
mk/platform/MyOS.mkThis file contains the platform-specific definitions that are used by pkgsrc. Start by copying one of the other files and edit it to your needs.
mk/tools/tools.MyOS.mkThis file defines the paths to all the tools that are needed by one or the other package in pkgsrc, as well as by pkgsrc itself. Find out where these tools are on your platform and add them.
Now, you should be able to build some basic packages, like
	lang/perl5, shells/bash.
Table of Contents
We checked to find a piece of software that wasn't in the packages collection, and picked GNU bison. Quite why someone would want to have bison when Berkeley yacc is already present in the tree is beyond us, but it's useful for the purposes of this exercise.
# $NetBSD: pkgsrc.html,v 1.266 2025/07/24 18:18:48 martin Exp $
#
DISTNAME=       bison-1.25
CATEGORIES=     devel
MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GNU:=bison/}
MAINTAINER=     pkgsrc-users@NetBSD.org
HOMEPAGE=       https://www.gnu.org/software/bison/bison.html
COMMENT=        GNU yacc clone
GNU_CONFIGURE=  yes
INFO_FILES=     yes
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
GNU version of yacc. Can make re-entrant parsers, and numerous other improvements. Why you would want this when Berkeley yacc(1) is part of the NetBSD source tree is beyond me.
@comment $NetBSD: pkgsrc.html,v 1.266 2025/07/24 18:18:48 martin Exp $ bin/bison man/man1/bison.1.gz share/bison.simple share/bison.hairy
The NetBSD package system comes with
        pkgtools/pkglint
	which helps to check the contents of these
	files. After installation it is quite easy to use, just change to the
	directory of the package you wish to examine and run
	pkglint:
$pkglintERROR: Makefile: Each package must define its LICENSE. WARN: Makefile:9: HOMEPAGE should migrate from http to https. NOTE: PLIST:3: The .gz extension is unnecessary for manual pages. WARN: PLIST:5: "share/bison.hairy" should be sorted before "share/bison.simple". 1 error, 2 warnings and 1 note found. (Run "pkglint -e" to show explanations.) (Run "pkglint -fs" to show what can be fixed automatically.) (Run "pkglint -F" to automatically fix some issues.)
Depending on the supplied command line arguments (see pkglint(1)), more checks will be performed. Use e.g. pkglint -Wall for a very thorough check.
Create the directory where the package lives, plus any auxiliary directories:
#cd /usr/pkgsrc/lang#mkdir bison#cd bison#mkdir patches
Create Makefile, DESCR and
      PLIST (see Chapter 12, Package components - files, directories and contents)
      then continue with fetching the distfile:
#make fetch>> bison-1.25.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system. >> Attempting to fetch from ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//. Requesting ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/) ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error >> Attempting to fetch from ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//. Requesting ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/) ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error >> Attempting to fetch from ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//. Requesting ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/) Successfully retrieved file.
Generate the checksum of the distfile into
      distinfo:
#make makedistinfo
Now compile:
#make>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz. ===> Extracting for bison-1.25 ===> Patching for bison-1.25 ===> Ignoring empty patch directory ===> Configuring for bison-1.25 creating cache ./config.cache checking for gcc... cc checking whether we are using GNU C... yes checking for a BSD compatible install... /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin checking how to run the C preprocessor... cc -E checking for minix/config.h... no checking for POSIXized ISC... no checking whether cross-compiling... no checking for ANSI C header files... yes checking for string.h... yes checking for stdlib.h... yes checking for memory.h... yes checking for working const... yes checking for working alloca.h... no checking for alloca... yes checking for strerror... yes updating cache ./config.cache creating ./config.status creating Makefile ===> Building for bison-1.25 cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g LR0.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g allocate.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g closure.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g conflicts.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g derives.c cc -c -DXPFILE=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.simple\" -DXPFILE1=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy\" -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -g ./files.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getargs.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g gram.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lalr.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lex.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g main.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g nullable.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g output.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g print.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reader.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reduce.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g symtab.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g warshall.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g version.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt.c cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt1.c cc -g -o bison LR0.o allocate.o closure.o conflicts.o derives.o files.o getargs.o gram.o lalr.o lex.o main.o nullable.o output.o print.o reader.o reduce.o symtab.o warshall.o version.o getopt.o getopt1.o ./files.c:240: warning: mktemp() possibly used unsafely, consider using mkstemp() rm -f bison.s1 sed -e "/^#line/ s|bison|/usr/pkg/share/bison|" < ./bison.simple > bison.s1
Everything seems OK, so install the files:
#make install>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz. ===> Installing for bison-1.25 sh ./mkinstalldirs /usr/pkg/bin /usr/pkg/share /usr/pkg/info /usr/pkg/man/man1 rm -f /usr/pkg/bin/bison cd /usr/pkg/share; rm -f bison.simple bison.hairy rm -f /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1 /usr/pkg/info/bison.info* install -c -o bin -g bin -m 555 bison /usr/pkg/bin/bison /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 bison.s1 /usr/pkg/share/bison.simple /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.hairy /usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy cd .; for f in bison.info*; do /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 $f /usr/pkg/info/$f; done /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.1 /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1 ===> Registering installation for bison-1.25
You can now use bison, and also - if you decide so - remove it with pkg_delete bison. Should you decide that you want a binary package, do this now:
#make package>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz. ===> Building package for bison-1.25 Creating package bison-1.25.tgz Registering depends:. Creating gzip'd tar ball in '/u/pkgsrc/lang/bison/bison-1.25.tgz'
Now that you don't need the source and object files any more, clean up:
#make clean===> Cleaning for bison-1.25
Table of Contents
A number of mechanisms are available in pkgsrc to improve the security of the resulting system. This page describes the mechanisms, and gives hints about detecting and fixing problems.
Mechanisms can be enabled individually in
mk.conf, and are
individually described below.
Typically, a feature will cause some programs to fail to build or work when first enabled. This can be due to latent problems in the program, and can be due to other reasons. After enough testing to have confidence that user problems will be quite rare, individual mechanisms will be enabled by default.
For each mechanism, see the Caveats section below for an explanation of what might go wrong at compile time and at run time, and how to notice and address these problems.
This allows substitute wrappers to be used for some commonly used library functions that do not have built-in bounds checking - but could in some cases.
Two mitigation levels are available:
"weak" only enables checks at compile-time.
"strong" enables checks at compile-time and runtime.
"strong" has been enabled by default since pkgsrc-2017Q3.
This enables a stack-smashing protection mitigation. It is done by adding a guard variable to functions with vulnerable objects. The guards are initialized when a function is entered and then checked when the function exits. The guard check will fail and the program forcibly exited if the variable was modified in the meantime. This can happen in case of buffer overflows or memory corruption, and therefore exposing these bugs.
Different mitigation levels are available:
"yes", which will only protect functions considered vulnerable by the compiler;
"all", which will protect every function;
"strong", the default, which will apply a better balance between the two settings above.
This mitigation is supported by both GCC and clang. It may be supported in additional compilers, possibly under a different name. It is particularly useful for unsafe programming languages, such as C/C++.
"yes" is enabled by default where known supported since pkgsrc-2017Q3.
"strong" is enabled by default where known supported since pkgsrc-2021Q4.
More details can be found here:
This requests the creation of PIE (Position Independent Executables) for all executables. The PIE mechanism is normally used for shared libraries, so that they can be loaded at differing addresses at runtime. PIE itself does not have useful security properties; however, it is necessary to fully leverage some, such as ASLR. Some operating systems support Address Space Layout Randomization (ASLR), which causes different addresses to be used each time a program is run. This makes it more difficult for an attacker to guess addresses and thus makes exploits harder to construct. With PIE, ASLR can really be applied to the entire program, instead of the stack and heap only.
PIE executables will only be built for toolchains that are known to support PIE. Currently, this means NetBSD on x86, ARM, SPARC64, m68k, and MIPS.
PKGSRC_MKPIE was enabled by default after the pkgsrc-2021Q3 branch.
This also makes the exploitation of some security vulnerabilities more difficult in some cases.
Two different mitigation levels are available:
partial (the default): the ELF sections are reordered so that internal data sections precede the program's own data sections, and non-PLT GOT is read-only;
full: in addition to partial RELRO, every relocation is performed immediately when starting the program, allowing the entire GOT to be read-only. This can greatly slow down startup of large programs.
This is currently supported by GCC. Many software distributions now enable this feature by default, at the "partial" level.
More details can be found here:
With this option, pkgsrc will try to build packages reproducibly. This allows
packages built from the same tree and with the same options, to produce
identical results bit by bit. This option should be combined with ASLR and
PKGSRC_MKPIE to avoid predictable address offsets for
attackers attempting to exploit security vulnerabilities.
More details can be found here:
More work likely needs to be done before pkgsrc is fully reproducible.
A number of packages may fail to build with this option enabled. The
failures are often related to the absence of the -fPIC
compilation flag when building libraries or executables (or ideally
-fPIE in the latter case). This flag is added to the
CFLAGS already, but requires the package to
actually support it.
These instructions are meant as a reference only; they likely need to be adapted for many packages individually.
For packages using Makefiles:
MAKE_FLAGS+=	CFLAGS=${CFLAGS:Q}
MAKE_FLAGS+=	LDFLAGS=${LDFLAGS:Q}
For packages using Imakefiles:
MAKE_FLAGS+=	CCOPTIONS=${CFLAGS:Q}
MAKE_FLAGS+=	LOCAL_LDFLAGS=${LDFLAGS:Q}
Some programs may fail to run, or crash at random times once built as PIE. Two scenarios are essentially possible. This is nearly always due to a bug in the program being exposed due to ASLR.
Ideally, packages should be fixed for compatibility with MKPIE. However, in some cases this is very difficult, due to complex build systems, packages using non-standard toolchains, or programming languages with odd bootstrapping mechanisms.
To disable PKGSRC_MKPIE on a per-package basis, set
MKPIE_SUPPORTED= no in the package's Makefile before
bsd.prefs.mk is included.
This feature makes use of pre-processing directives to look for hardened, alternative implementations of essential library calls. Some programs may fail to build as a result; this usually happens for those trying too hard to be portable, or otherwise abusing definitions in the standard library.
This feature may cause some programs to crash, usually indicating an actual bug in the program. The fix will typically involve patching the original program's source code.
At least in the case of GCC, FORTIFY will only be applied if optimization is
applied while compiling. This means that the CFLAGS should
also contain -O, -O2 or another
optimization level. This cannot easily be applied globally, as some packages
may require specific optimization levels.
FORTIFY should not be disabled to work around runtime crashes in the program! This is a very bad idea and will expose you to security vulnerabilities.
To disable FORTIFY on a per-package basis, set the following
in the package's Makefile
before bsd.prefs.mk is included:
FORTIFY_SUPPORTED= no
For better protection, full RELRO requires every symbol to be resolved when the program starts, rather than simply when required at run-time. This will have more impact on programs using a lot of symbols, or linked to libraries exposing a lot of symbols. Therefore, daemons or programs otherwise running in background are affected only when started. Programs loading plug-ins at run-time are affected when loading the plug-ins.
The impact is not expected to be noticeable on modern hardware, except in some cases for big programs.
Some programs handle plug-ins and dependencies in a way that conflicts with RELRO: for instance, with an initialization routine listing any other plug-in required. With full RELRO, the missing symbols are resolved before the initialization routine can run, and the dynamic loader will not be able to find them directly and abort as a result. Unfortunately, this is how Xorg loads its drivers. Partial RELRO can be applied instead in this case.
The stack-smashing protection provided by this option does not work for some programs. The most common situation in which this happens is when the program allocates variables on the stack, with the size determined at run-time.
Again, this feature may cause some programs to crash via a
SIGABRT, usually indicating an actual bug in the program.
On NetBSD LOG_CRIT level syslog
messages are sent and - by default -
appended to /var/log/messages, e.g.:
Jan 6 15:42:51 hostname -: hostname program - - - buffer overflow detected; terminated
(where hostname is the hostname(1) and
program is the basename(1) of the program crashed).
Patching the original program is then required.
Rebuilding the package via:
% env CFLAGS=-g INSTALL_UNSTRIPPED=yes make replace
and inspecting the backtrace of the coredump via the debugger should point out the problematic call by inspecting the frame calling the _chk() (SSP) function.
The compiler emits extra code when using this feature: a check for buffer overflows is performed when entering and exiting functions, requiring an extra variable on the stack. The level of protection can otherwise be adjusted to affect only those functions considered more sensitive by the compiler (with -fstack-protector instead of -fstack-protector-all).
The impact is not expected to be noticeable on modern hardware. However, programs with a hard requirement to run at the fastest possible speed should avoid using this feature, or using libraries built with this feature.
SSP should not be disabled to work around runtime crashes in the program! This is a very bad idea and will expose you to security vulnerabilities.
To disable SSP on a per-package basis, set the following
in the package's Makefile
before bsd.prefs.mk is included:
SSP_SUPPORTED= no
The illusion of security is worse than having no security at all. This section lists a number of ways to ensure the security features requested are actually effective.
These instructions were obtained and tested on a system derived from NetBSD 7 (amd64). YMMV.
The ELF executable type in use changes for binaries built as PIE; without:
$ file /path/to/bin/ary
/path/to/bin/ary: ELF 64-bit LSB executable, x86-64, version 1 (SYSV), dynamically linked (uses shared libs), for NetBSD 7.0, not stripped
as opposed to the following binary, built as PIE:
$ file /path/to/pie/bin/ary
/path/to/pie/bin/ary: ELF 64-bit LSB shared object, x86-64, version 1 (SYSV), dynamically linked (uses shared libs), for NetBSD 7.0, not stripped
The latter result is then what is expected.
The following command should list a section called RELRO:
$ objdump -p /path/to/bin/ary
/path/to/bin/ary:     file format elf64-x86-64
Program Header:
[...]
   RELRO off    0x0000000000000d78 vaddr 0x0000000000600d78 paddr 0x0000000000600d78 align 2**0
This check is now performed automatically if
PKG_DEVELOPER is set and RELRO is enabled.
The dynamic loader will apply RELRO immediately when detecting the presence of
the BIND_NOW flag:
$ objdump -x /path/to/bin/ary
/path/to/bin/ary:     file format elf64-x86-64
Dynamic Section:
[...]
  BIND_NOW             0x0000000000000000
This has to be combined with partial RELRO (see above) to be fully efficient.
This check is now performed automatically (where supported) if
PKG_DEVELOPER is set.
Checking for SSP using this method only works where the operating system
uses libssp. libssp is not used
on recent NetBSD/FreeBSD/Linux versions.
Building objects, binaries and libraries with SSP will affect the presence of additional symbols in the resulting file:
$ nm /path/to/bin/ary
[...]
                 U __stack_chk_fail
0000000000600ea0 B __stack_chk_guard
This is an indicator that the program was indeed built with support for SSP.
This check is now performed automatically (where supported) if
PKG_DEVELOPER is set and SSP is enabled.
Table of Contents
#make===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2 => figlet221.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system. => Attempting to fetch figlet221.tar.gz from ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/program/unix/. => [172219 bytes] Connected to ftp.plig.net. 220 ftp.plig.org NcFTPd Server (licensed copy) ready. 331 Guest login ok, send your complete e-mail address as password. 230-You are user #5 of 500 simultaneous users allowed. 230- 230- ___ _ _ _ 230- | _| |_ ___ ___| |_|___ ___ ___ ___ 230- | _| _| . |_| . | | | . |_| . | _| . | 230- |_| |_| | _|_| _|_|_|_ |_|___|_| |_ | 230- |_| |_| |___| |___| 230- 230-** Welcome to ftp.plig.org ** 230- 230-Please note that all transfers from this FTP site are logged. If you 230-do not like this, please disconnect now. 230- 230-This archive is available via 230- 230-HTTP: http://ftp.plig.org/ 230-FTP: ftp://ftp.plig.org/ (max 500 connections) 230-RSYNC: rsync://ftp.plig.org/ (max 30 connections) 230- 230-Please email comments, bug reports and requests for packages to be 230-mirrored to ftp-admin@plig.org. 230- 230- 230 Logged in anonymously. Remote system type is UNIX. Using binary mode to transfer files. 200 Type okay. 250 "/pub" is new cwd. 250-"/pub/figlet" is new cwd. 250- 250-Welcome to the figlet archive at ftp.figlet.org 250- 250- ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/ 250- 250-The official FIGlet web page is: 250- http://www.figlet.org/ 250- 250-If you have questions, please mailto:info@figlet.org. If you want to 250-contribute a font or something else, you can email us. 250 250 "/pub/figlet/program" is new cwd. 250 "/pub/figlet/program/unix" is new cwd. local: figlet221.tar.gz remote: figlet221.tar.gz 502 Unimplemented command. 227 Entering Passive Mode (195,40,6,41,246,104) 150 Data connection accepted from 84.128.86.72:65131; transfer starting for figlet221.tar.gz (172219 bytes). 38% |************** | 65800 64.16 KB/s 00:01 ETA 226 Transfer completed. 172219 bytes received in 00:02 (75.99 KB/s) 221 Goodbye. => Checksum OK for figlet221.tar.gz. ===> Extracting for figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Required installed package ccache-[0-9]*: ccache-2.3nb1 found ===> Patching for figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Applying pkgsrc patches for figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Overriding tools for figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Creating toolchain wrappers for figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Configuring for figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Building for figlet-2.2.1nb2 gcc -O2 -DDEFAULTFONTDIR=\"/usr/pkg/share/figlet\" -DDEFAULTFONTFILE=\"standard.flf\" figlet.c zipio.c crc.c inflate.c -o figlet chmod a+x figlet gcc -O2 -o chkfont chkfont.c => Unwrapping files-to-be-installed.##make install===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2 ===> Installing for figlet-2.2.1nb2 install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/bin install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/man/man6 mkdir -p /usr/pkg/share/figlet cp figlet /usr/pkg/bin cp chkfont /usr/pkg/bin chmod 555 figlist showfigfonts cp figlist /usr/pkg/bin cp showfigfonts /usr/pkg/bin cp fonts/*.flf /usr/pkg/share/figlet cp fonts/*.flc /usr/pkg/share/figlet cp figlet.6 /usr/pkg/man/man6 ===> Registering installation for figlet-2.2.1nb2#
Table of Contents
As in other big projects, the directory layout of pkgsrc
	is quite complex for newbies. This chapter explains where you
	find things on the FTP server. The base directory on
	ftp.NetBSD.org is /pub/pkgsrc/.
	On other servers it may be different, but inside this directory,
	everything should look the same, no matter on which server you
	are. This directory contains some subdirectories, which are
	explained below.
The directory distfiles contains lots
	of archive files from all pkgsrc packages, which are mirrored
	here. The subdirectories are called after their package names
	and are used when the distributed files have names that don't
	explicitly contain a version number or are otherwise too generic
	(for example release.tar.gz).
This directory contains things that individual pkgsrc developers find worth publishing.
This directory contains binary packages for the various
	platforms that are supported by pkgsrc.
	Each subdirectory is of the form OPSYS/ARCH/OSVERSION_TAG. The meaning of these variables is:
OPSYS is the name of the
	operating system for which the packages have been built. The
	name is taken from the output of the uname
	command, so it may differ from the one you are used to
	hear.
ARCH is the hardware
	architecture of the platform for which the packages have been
	built. It also includes the ABI (Application
	Binary Interface) for platforms that have several of
	them.
OSVERSION is the version of
	the operating system.  Typically it is the version defining an
	ABI, e.g. 9.0.
TAG is either
	20
	for a stable branch, or YYQNcurrent for packages
	built from the HEAD branch. The latter should only be used when
	the packages are updated on a regular basis.
The rationale for this scheme is that users can first search by OPSYS and ARCH, since these are more or less unchangeable. After that, there is a management set of directories with OSVERSION and TAG.
See also README.md in
	packages for more details, including
	about symlinks.
In each of these directories, there is a
	whole binary packages collection for a specific platform. It has a directory called
	All which contains all binary packages.
	
Here are the reports from bulk builds, for those who want
	to fix packages that didn't build on some of the platforms. The
	structure of subdirectories should look like the one in Section D.3, “packages: Binary packages”.
These directories contain the “real” pkgsrc, that is the files that define how to create binary packages from source archives.
Each of the current,
	stable and
	pkgsrc-20
	directories share the same structure.  They each contain a
	xxQypkgsrc directory and
	pkgsrc.tar.{bz,gz,xz} file.
The directory pkgsrc contains a
	snapshot of the CVS repository, which is updated regularly. The
	file pkgsrc.tar.{bz,gz,xz} contains the same
	as the directory, ready to be downloaded as a whole.
The current directory contains files
	related to the HEAD branch of the CVS repository.
	In this directory there is an additional file called
	pkgsrc-readmes.tar.{bz,gz,xz} that contains
	all pkgsrc READMEs with information about
	categories and packages.
	
The stable directory is a symlink to
	the latest 
	pkgsrc-20.
	xxQy
The
	pkgsrc-20.
	directories contain files related to the 
	xxQy-20
	stable branch of the CVS repository. In these directories there is
	an additional file called
	xxQypkgsrc-20,
	which contains the state of pkgsrc when it was branched.xxQy.tar.{bz,gz,xz}
The following list contains all help topics that are available when running bmake help topic=:index.
| #! | -lintl | 
| 32bit | 64bit | 
| ABI | ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES | 
| ACROREAD_FONTPATH | AFAIK | 
| AIX | ALLOW_NETWORK_ACCESS | 
| ALLOW_NEWER_COMPILER | ALLOW_VULNERABLE_PACKAGES | 
| ALL_ENV | ALSA_PC | 
| ALTERNATIVES_SRC | AMANDA_TMP | 
| AMANDA_USER | AMANDA_VAR | 
| APACHE_GROUP | APACHE_MODULE_NAME | 
| APACHE_MODULE_SRC | APACHE_MODULE_SRCDIR | 
| APACHE_PKG_PREFIX | APACHE_SUEXEC_CONFIGURE_ARGS | 
| APACHE_SUEXEC_DOCROOT | APACHE_USER | 
| ARGMAX_REQ | ARG_MAX | 
| ARLA_CACHE | AUDIT_PACKAGES_FLAGS | 
| AUTOCONF_REQD | AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE | 
| AUTOMAKE_REQD | AUTO_MKDIRS | 
| AUX | BDB185_DEFAULT | 
| BDBBASE | BDB_ACCEPTED | 
| BDB_DEFAULT | BDB_LIBS | 
| BDB_TYPE | BINCIMAP_GROUP | 
| BINCIMAP_LOG_USER | BINCIMAP_USER | 
| BIND_DIR | BIND_GROUP | 
| BIND_USER | BINOWN | 
| BINPKG_SITES | BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS | 
| BISON_PKGDATADIR | BLAS | 
| BLAS_ACCEPTED | BLAS_C_INTERFACE | 
| BLAS_INCLUDES | BLAS_INDEX64 | 
| BLAS_LIBS | BLAS_PC | 
| BLAS_TYPE | BOOTSTRAP_DEPENDS | 
| BROKEN | BROKEN_EXCEPT_ON_PLATFORM | 
| BROKEN_ON_PLATFORM | BSDSRCDIR | 
| BSDXSRCDIR | BSD_MAKE_ENV | 
| BUILDLINK_AUTO_DIRS | BUILDLINK_AUTO_VARS | 
| BUILDLINK_CFLAGS | BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER | 
| BUILDLINK_CPPFLAGS | BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD | 
| BUILDLINK_FILES | BUILDLINK_FILES_CMD | 
| BUILDLINK_FNAME_TRANSFORM | BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS | 
| BUILDLINK_LIBS | BUILDLINK_OPSYS_SUPPORT_PTHREAD | 
| BUILDLINK_PKGNAME | BUILDLINK_PREFIX | 
| BUILDLINK_RPATHDIRS | BUILDLINK_TREE | 
| BUILD_DEFS | BUILD_DEFS_EFFECTS | 
| BUILD_DEPENDS | BUILD_DIRS | 
| BUILD_ENV_SHELL | BUILD_MAKE_CMD | 
| BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS | BUILD_TARGET | 
| BUILTIN_FIND_FILES | BUILTIN_FIND_FILES_VAR | 
| BUILTIN_FIND_GREP | BUILTIN_FIND_HEADERS | 
| BUILTIN_FIND_HEADERS_VAR | BUILTIN_FIND_PKGCONFIG | 
| BUILTIN_FIND_PKGCONFIG_VAR | BUILTIN_PKG | 
| BUILTIN_TEST_CURSES_DEFINES | BUILTIN_TEST_CURSES_FUNCS | 
| BUILTIN_VERSION_SCRIPT | BUILTIN_X11_TYPE | 
| BUILTIN_X11_VERSION | CACTI_GROUP | 
| CACTI_USER | CANNA_GROUP | 
| CANNA_USER | CAT | 
| CBLAS_LIBS | CBLAS_PC | 
| CCACHE_BASE | CCACHE_DIR | 
| CCACHE_LOGFILE | CCACHE_RECACHE | 
| CC_VERSION | CC_VERSION_STRING | 
| CDRECORD_CONF | CDROM_PKG_URL_DIR | 
| CDROM_PKG_URL_HOST | CHANGES | 
| CHECKOUT_DATE | CHECK_COMPILER | 
| CHECK_FAKEHOME | CHECK_FILES | 
| CHECK_FILES_ONLY_PREFIX | CHECK_FILES_SKIP | 
| CHECK_FILES_STRICT | CHECK_HEADERS | 
| CHECK_HEADERS_SKIP | CHECK_INTERPRETER | 
| CHECK_INTERPRETER_SKIP | CHECK_PERMS | 
| CHECK_PERMS_AUTOFIX | CHECK_PERMS_SKIP | 
| CHECK_PIE | CHECK_PIE_SKIP | 
| CHECK_PIE_SUPPORTED | CHECK_PORTABILITY | 
| CHECK_PORTABILITY_EXPERIMENTAL | CHECK_PORTABILITY_SKIP | 
| CHECK_RELRO | CHECK_RELRO_SKIP | 
| CHECK_RELRO_SUPPORTED | CHECK_SHLIBS | 
| CHECK_SHLIBS_SKIP | CHECK_SHLIBS_SUPPORTED | 
| CHECK_SHLIBS_TOXIC | CHECK_SSP | 
| CHECK_SSP_SKIP | CHECK_SSP_SUPPORTED | 
| CHECK_STRIPPED | CHECK_STRIPPED_SKIP | 
| CHECK_WRKREF | CHECK_WRKREF_EXTRA_DIRS | 
| CHECK_WRKREF_SKIP | CLAMAV_DBDIR | 
| CLAMAV_GROUP | CLAMAV_USER | 
| CLANGBASE | CLEANDEPENDS | 
| CLT | CMAKE_DEPENDENCIES_REWRITE | 
| CMAKE_INSTALL_NAME_DIR | CMAKE_INSTALL_PREFIX | 
| CMAKE_MODULE_PATH_OVERRIDE | CMAKE_PKGSRC_BUILD_FLAGS | 
| CMAKE_PREFIX_PATH | CMAKE_USE_GNU_INSTALL_DIRS | 
| COMMON_LISP_DOCFILES | COMMON_LISP_EXAMPLES | 
| COMMON_LISP_EXTRAFILES | COMMON_LISP_PACKAGES | 
| COMMON_LISP_SYSTEM | COMPILER_RPATH_FLAG | 
| COMPILER_USE_SYMLINKS | CONFIGURE_ARGS | 
| CONFIGURE_DIRS | CONFIGURE_ENV | 
| CONFIGURE_ENV_SHELL | CONFIGURE_HAS_INFODIR | 
| CONFIGURE_HAS_MANDIR | CONFIGURE_SCRIPT | 
| CONFIG_SHELL | CONFIG_SHELL_FLAGS | 
| CONF_FILES | CONF_FILES_MODE | 
| CONF_FILES_PERMS | CONSERVER_DEFAULTHOST | 
| CONSERVER_DEFAULTPORT | CP | 
| CPE | CPE_EDITION | 
| CPE_LANG | CPE_OTHER | 
| CPE_PART | CPE_PRODUCT | 
| CPE_SW_EDITION | CPE_TARGET_HW | 
| CPE_TARGET_SW | CPE_UPDATE | 
| CPE_URI | CPE_VENDOR | 
| CPE_VERSION | CPP | 
| CPP_PRECOMP_FLAGS | CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK | 
| CROSSBASE | CTFCONVERT | 
| CTF_FILES_SKIP | CTF_SUPPORTED | 
| CTYPE | CUPS_GROUP | 
| CUPS_SYSTEM_GROUPS | CUPS_USER | 
| CURSES_DEFAULT | CURSES_TYPE | 
| CVS_EXTRACTDIR | CVS_MODULE | 
| CVS_PROJECT | CVS_REPOSITORIES | 
| CVS_ROOT | CVS_ROOT_GNU | 
| CVS_ROOT_NONGNU | CVS_ROOT_SOURCEFORGE | 
| CVS_TAG | CYRUS_GROUP | 
| CYRUS_IDLE | CYRUS_USER | 
| DAEMONTOOLS_GROUP | DAEMONTOOLS_LOG_USER | 
| DARWIN_NO_SYSTEM_LIBS | DARWIN_REQUIRES_FILTER | 
| DBUS_GROUP | DBUS_USER | 
| DEFANG_GROUP | DEFANG_USER | 
| DEFAULT_ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES | DEFAULT_DISTFILES | 
| DEFAULT_IRC_SERVER | DEFAULT_SERIAL_DEVICE | 
| DEF_UMASK | DEINSTALLDEPENDS | 
| DEINSTALL_SRC | DEINSTALL_TEMPLATES | 
| DELAYED_ERROR_MSG | DELAYED_WARNING_MSG | 
| DEPENDS | DEPENDS_TARGET | 
| DEPENDS_TYPE | DESTDIR | 
| DESTDIR_VARNAME | DIALER_GROUP | 
| DIGEST_REQD | DISTDIR | 
| DISTFILES | DISTINFO_FILE | 
| DISTNAME | DIST_PATH | 
| DIST_SUBDIR | DJBDNS_AXFR_USER | 
| DJBDNS_CACHE_USER | DJBDNS_DJBDNS_GROUP | 
| DJBDNS_LOG_USER | DJBDNS_RBL_USER | 
| DJBDNS_TINY_USER | DLOPEN_REQUIRE_PTHREADS | 
| DL_AUTO_VARS | DL_CFLAGS | 
| DL_LDFLAGS | DL_LIBS | 
| DNS | DOCOWN | 
| DOWNLOADED_DISTFILE | DQCACHE_GROUP | 
| DQCACHE_USER | DT_LAYOUT | 
| DYNAMIC_SITES_CMD | DYNAMIC_SITES_SCRIPT | 
| ECHO | ECHO_N | 
| ELK_GUI | EMACS_TYPE | 
| EMULDIR | EMULSUBDIR | 
| EMULSUBDIRSLASH | EMUL_ARCH | 
| EMUL_DISTRO | EMUL_EXEC_FMT | 
| EMUL_IS_NATIVE | EMUL_MODULES | 
| EMUL_OPSYS | EMUL_PKG_FMT | 
| EMUL_PLATFORM | EMUL_PLATFORMS | 
| EMUL_PREFER | EMUL_REQD | 
| EMUL_TYPE | ERROR_MSG | 
| EXIM_GROUP | EXIM_USER | 
| EXPORT_SYMBOLS_LDFLAGS | EXTRACTOR | 
| EXTRACT_CMD | EXTRACT_CMD_DEFAULT | 
| EXTRACT_DIR | EXTRACT_ELEMENTS | 
| EXTRACT_ENV | EXTRACT_ONLY | 
| EXTRACT_OPTS | EXTRACT_SUFX | 
| EXTRACT_USING | FAIL | 
| FAILOVER_FETCH | FAIL_MSG | 
| FAKE_NCURSES | FAM | 
| FAM_ACCEPTED | FAM_DEFAULT | 
| FAM_SERVER | FCPATH | 
| FETCH_AFTER_ARGS | FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS | 
| FETCH_CMD | FETCH_INSECURE | 
| FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS | FETCH_PROXY | 
| FETCH_RESUME_ARGS | FETCH_TIMEOUT | 
| FETCH_USE_IPV4_ONLY | FETCH_USING | 
| FILES_SUBST | FILES_SUBST_SED | 
| FIX_SYSTEM_HEADERS | FONTDIR | 
| FONTS_DIRS | FONTS_VERBOSE | 
| FOO_HACKS_MK | FORCE_CXX_STD | 
| FORCE_C_STD | FOSSIL_EXTRACTDIR | 
| FOSSIL_REPO | FOSSIL_REPOSITORIES | 
| FOSSIL_VERSION | FOX_USE_XUNICODE | 
| FREEWNN_GROUP | FREEWNN_USER | 
| FTP_PKG_URL_DIR | FTP_PKG_URL_HOST | 
| GAMEDATAMODE | GAMEDATA_PERMS | 
| GAMEDIRMODE | GAMEDIR_PERMS | 
| GAMEGRP | GAMEMODE | 
| GAMEOWN | GAMES_GROUP | 
| GAMES_USER | GCC | 
| GCCBASE | GCC_REQD | 
| GCC_VERSION_SUFFIX | GEM_BUILD | 
| GEM_CLEANBUILD | GEM_CLEANBUILD_EXTENSIONS | 
| GEM_DOCDIR | GEM_EXTSDIR | 
| GEM_HOME | GEM_KEEPBUILD | 
| GEM_LIBDIR | GEM_NAME | 
| GEM_PATH | GEM_PLUGINSDIR | 
| GEM_SPECFILE | GENERATE_PLIST | 
| GHC | GHOSTSCRIPT_REQD | 
| GITHUB_PROJECT | GITHUB_RELEASE | 
| GITHUB_SUBMODULES | GITHUB_TAG | 
| GITHUB_TYPE | GITLAB_PROJECT | 
| GITLAB_RELEASE | GITLAB_SUBMODULES | 
| GITLAB_TAG | GITLAB_TYPE | 
| GIT_BRANCH | GIT_ENV | 
| GIT_EXTRACTDIR | GIT_REPO | 
| GIT_REPOSITORIES | GIT_REVISION | 
| GIT_TAG | GNAT | 
| GNU | GNU_CONFIGURE | 
| GNU_CONFIGURE_ICONV | GNU_CONFIGURE_INFODIR | 
| GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR | GNU_CONFIGURE_QUIET | 
| GNU_CONFIGURE_STRICT | GODEP_REDIRECTS | 
| GO_BUILD_PATTERN | GO_DEPS | 
| GO_DIST_BASE | GO_EXTRA_MOD_DIRS | 
| GO_MODULE_EXTRACT | GO_MODULE_FILES | 
| GO_SRCPATH | GROUP_SPECIFIC_PKGS | 
| GRUB_NETWORK_CARDS | GRUB_PRESET_COMMAND | 
| GRUB_SCAN_ARGS | GZIP | 
| HASKELL_COMPILER | HASKELL_DISABLE_EXECUTABLES | 
| HASKELL_DISABLE_LIBRARIES | HASKELL_ENABLE_DYNAMIC_EXECUTABLE | 
| HASKELL_ENABLE_HADDOCK_DOCUMENTATION | HASKELL_ENABLE_LIBRARY_PROFILING | 
| HASKELL_ENABLE_SHARED_LIBRARY | HASKELL_ENABLE_TESTS | 
| HASKELL_OPTIMIZATION_LEVEL | HASKELL_PKG_NAME | 
| HASKELL_UNRESTRICT_DEPENDENCIES | HEADER_TEMPLATES | 
| HG_REPO | HG_REPOSITORIES | 
| HG_TAG | HOMEPAGE | 
| HOST_PKGTOOLS_ARGS | HOST_SPECIFIC_PKGS | 
| HOWL_GROUP | HOWL_USER | 
| ICCBASE | ICECAST_CHROOTDIR | 
| ICON_THEMES | IDOBASE | 
| IGNORE_CCACHE | IGNORE_INFO_DIRS | 
| IGNORE_INTERACTIVE_FETCH | IMAKE | 
| IMAKEOPTS | IMAKE_MAKE | 
| IMAKE_MANINSTALL | IMAP_UW_CCLIENT_MBOX_FMT | 
| IMDICTDIR | INCOMPAT_CURSES | 
| INFO_DIR | INFO_FILES | 
| INFO_MSG | INIT_SYSTEM | 
| INN_DATA_DIR | INN_GROUP | 
| INN_USER | INSTALLATION_DIRS | 
| INSTALLATION_DIRS_FROM_PLIST | INSTALL_ENV | 
| INSTALL_ENV_SHELL | INSTALL_SH_OVERRIDE | 
| INSTALL_SRC | INSTALL_TEMPLATES | 
| INSTALL_UNSTRIPPED | IRCD_HYBRID_IRC_GROUP | 
| IRCD_HYBRID_IRC_USER | IRCD_HYBRID_MAXCONN | 
| IRCD_HYBRID_NICLEN | IRCD_HYBRID_SYSLOG_EVENTS | 
| IRCD_HYBRID_SYSLOG_FACILITY | IRCD_HYBRID_TOPICLEN | 
| IRIX | IRRD_USE_PGP | 
| JABBERD_GROUP | JABBERD_LOGDIR | 
| JABBERD_PIDDIR | JABBERD_SPOOLDIR | 
| JABBERD_USER | JAVA_APP_PATH | 
| JAVA_APP_TARGETS | JAVA_BINPREFIX | 
| JAVA_CLASSPATH | JAVA_HOME | 
| JAVA_LD_LIBRARY_PATH | JAVA_NAME | 
| JAVA_UNLIMIT | JAVA_WRAPPERS | 
| JPEG_ACCEPTED | JPEG_DEFAULT | 
| KERBEROS | KERMIT_SUID_UUCP | 
| KJS_USE_PCRE | KNEWS_DOMAIN_FILE | 
| KNEWS_DOMAIN_NAME | KRB5_ACCEPTED | 
| KRB5_DEFAULT | LANGUAGES | 
| LAPACKE_LIBS | LAPACKE_PC | 
| LAPACK_LIBS | LAPACK_PC | 
| LATEX2HTML_ICONPATH | LDCONFIG_ADD_CMD | 
| LDCONFIG_REMOVE_CMD | LDD | 
| LEAFNODE_DATA_DIR | LEAFNODE_GROUP | 
| LEAFNODE_USER | LIBDVDCSS_HOMEPAGE | 
| LIBDVDCSS_MASTER_SITES | LIBIMAGEQUANT_TYPE | 
| LIBRSVG_TYPE | LIBTOOL | 
| LIBTOOLIZE_PLIST | LIBTOOL_M4_OVERRIDE | 
| LIBUSB_TYPE | LICENSE | 
| LINKER_RPATH_FLAG | LINK_RPATH_FLAG | 
| LINUX_BASE_NODEPS | LINUX_BASE_PREFERRED | 
| LINUX_BASE_REQUIRED | LINUX_LOCALES | 
| LOCALBASE | LOCALBASE_LOCKTYPE | 
| LOCALPATCHES | LOVE_DATA | 
| LOVE_GAME | LOVE_VERSION | 
| LOWER_OPSYS | LOWER_OPSYS_VERSUFFIX | 
| LOWER_VARIANT_VERSION | LOWER_VENDOR | 
| LP32PLATFORMS | LP64PLATFORMS | 
| LUA_BUSTED_ARGS | LUA_CDIR | 
| LUA_COMPILER | LUA_DOCDIR | 
| LUA_EXAMPLESDIR | LUA_INCDIR | 
| LUA_INTERPRETER | LUA_LDIR | 
| LUA_LINKER_MAGIC | LUA_PKGPREFIX | 
| LUA_SELF_CONFLICT | LUA_USE_BUSTED | 
| LUA_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | LUA_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE | 
| LUA_VERSION_DEFAULT | LUA_VERSION_REQD | 
| Lua | MACHINE_PLATFORM | 
| MAILAGENT_DOMAIN | MAILAGENT_EMAIL | 
| MAILAGENT_FQDN | MAILAGENT_ORGANIZATION | 
| MAJORDOMO_HOMEDIR | MAJOR_OS_VERSION | 
| MAKEINFO_ARGS | MAKE_DIRS | 
| MAKE_DIRS_PERMS | MAKE_ENV | 
| MAKE_FILE | MAKE_FLAGS | 
| MAKE_JOBS | MAKE_JOBS_SAFE | 
| MAKE_PROGRAM | MANCOMPRESSED_IF_MANZ | 
| MANINSTALL | MANZ | 
| MARIADB_VERSIONS_ALL | MASTER_SITES | 
| MASTER_SITE_BACKUP | MASTER_SITE_LOCAL | 
| MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA | MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE | 
| MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN | MASTER_SORT | 
| MASTER_SORT_RANDOM | MASTER_SORT_REGEX | 
| MECAB_CHARSET | MEDIATOMB_GROUP | 
| MEDIATOMB_USER | MIPSPROBASE | 
| MIREDO_GROUP | MIREDO_USER | 
| MISSING_FEATURES | MKDIR | 
| MKPIE_SUPPORTED | MLDONKEY_GROUP | 
| MLDONKEY_HOME | MLDONKEY_USER | 
| MONOTONE_GROUP | MONOTONE_USER | 
| MOTIFBASE | MOTIF_TYPE | 
| MOTIF_TYPE_DEFAULT | MPI_TYPE | 
| MSGFMT_STRIP_MSGCTXT | MSGFMT_STRIP_MSGID_PLURAL | 
| MTOOLS_ENABLE_FLOPPYD | MUST | 
| MV | MYSQL_CHARSET | 
| MYSQL_DATADIR | MYSQL_EXTRA_CHARSET | 
| MYSQL_GROUP | MYSQL_USER | 
| MYSQL_VERSION | MYSQL_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | 
| MYSQL_VERSION_DEFAULT | NAGIOSCMD_GROUP | 
| NAGIOSDIR | NAGIOS_GROUP | 
| NAGIOS_USER | NATIVE_EXEC_FMT | 
| NATIVE_LOWER_OPSYS | NATIVE_LOWER_VENDOR | 
| NATIVE_MACHINE_PLATFORM | NATIVE_OBJECT_FMT | 
| NATIVE_OPSYS_VERSION | NATIVE_OS_VARIANT | 
| NATIVE_OS_VERSION | NBPAX_PROGRAM_PREFIX | 
| NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME | NMH_EDITOR | 
| NMH_MTA | NMH_PAGER | 
| NODE_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | NODE_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE | 
| NODE_VERSION_DEFAULT | NODE_VERSION_REQD | 
| NOLOGIN | NOTE | 
| NOT_FOR_PLATFORM | NOT_PAX_ASLR_SAFE | 
| NOT_PAX_MPROTECT_SAFE | NO_BUILD | 
| NO_CHECKSUM | NO_CONFIGURE | 
| NO_SKIP | NSD_GROUP | 
| NSD_LOG_FACILITY | NSD_USER | 
| NS_PREFERRED | NULLMAILER_GROUP | 
| NULLMAILER_USER | OBJECT_FMT | 
| OBJHOSTNAME | OBJMACHINE | 
| OCAML_FINDLIB_DIRS | OCAML_FINDLIB_REGISTER | 
| OCAML_FINDLIB_REGISTER_VERBOSE | OCAML_SITELIBDIR | 
| OMF | ONLY_FOR_COMPILER | 
| ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM | OPENSSH_CHROOT | 
| OPENSSH_GROUP | OPENSSH_USER | 
| OPSYS | OPSYS_EMULDIR | 
| OPSYS_VERSION | OS | 
| OSS_TYPE | OSX | 
| OSX_PATH_TO_M4 | OSX_PATH_TO_YACC | 
| OS_HAVE_ALSA | OS_HAVE_RCD | 
| OS_VARIANT | OS_VERSION | 
| OTF_FONTS_DIR | OVERRIDE_DIRDEPTH | 
| OVERRIDE_GEMSPEC | OVERRIDE_GNU_CONFIG_SCRIPTS | 
| OVERRIDE_ROCKSPEC | OWN_DIRS | 
| OWN_DIRS_PERMS | P4GROUP | 
| P4PORT | P4ROOT | 
| P4USER | PACKAGES | 
| PALMOS_DEFAULT_SDK | PAMBASE | 
| PAM_DEFAULT | PAPERSIZE | 
| PASSIVE_FETCH | PATCHDIR | 
| PATCHFILES | PATCH_ARGS | 
| PATCH_DEBUG | PATCH_DIST_ARGS | 
| PATCH_DIST_CAT | PATCH_DIST_STRIP | 
| PATCH_FUZZ_FACTOR | PATCH_STRIP | 
| PATH | PCCBASE | 
| PEAR | PEAR_CHANNEL | 
| PEAR_CHANNEL_ALIAS | PEAR_CHANNEL_VERSION | 
| PEAR_CMD | PEAR_LIB | 
| PEAR_PACKAGE_XML | PEP-518 | 
| PERL5 | PERL5_CONFIGURE | 
| PERL5_CONFIGURE_DIRS | PERL5_LDFLAGS | 
| PERL5_LICENSE | PERL5_MODULE_TYPE | 
| PERL5_PACKLIST | PERL5_PACKLIST_DIR | 
| PERL5_PERLBASE | PERL5_SITEBASE | 
| PERL5_USE_PACKLIST | PERL5_VENDORBASE | 
| PFCTL | PFVAR_H | 
| PF_VERSION | PGGROUP | 
| PGHOME | PGPKGSRCDIR | 
| PGSQL_TYPE | PGSQL_VERSION | 
| PGSQL_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | PGSQL_VERSION_DEFAULT | 
| PGUSER | PG_LIB_EXT | 
| PHP | PHPCOMMON_MK | 
| PHPPKGSRCDIR | PHP_BASE_VERS | 
| PHP_EGDIR | PHP_EXTENSION_DIR | 
| PHP_INCDIR | PHP_LIBDIR | 
| PHP_MAJOR_VERS | PHP_MINIMUM_TEENY | 
| PHP_MINOR_VERS | PHP_PKG_PREFIX | 
| PHP_SHAREDIR | PHP_VER | 
| PHP_VERSION | PHP_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | 
| PHP_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE | PHP_VERSION_DEFAULT | 
| PHP_VERSION_REQD | PILRC_USE_GTK | 
| PKGCONFIG_BASE | PKGCONFIG_FILE | 
| PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE | PKGCONFIG_OVERRIDE_STAGE | 
| PKGDIR | PKGGNUDIR | 
| PKGINFODIR | PKGLOCALEDIR | 
| PKGMANDIR | PKGNAME | 
| PKGNAME_REQD | PKGPATH | 
| PKGREVISION | PKGSRC_BLAS_TYPES | 
| PKGSRC_CHANGES | PKGSRC_COMPILER | 
| PKGSRC_KEEP_BIN_PKGS | PKGSRC_LOCKTYPE | 
| PKGSRC_MAKE_ENV | PKGSRC_MESSAGE_RECIPIENTS | 
| PKGSRC_MKPIE | PKGSRC_MKREPRO | 
| PKGSRC_OVERRIDE_MKPIE | PKGSRC_RUN_TEST | 
| PKGSRC_SETENV | PKGSRC_SLEEPSECS | 
| PKGSRC_TODO | PKGSRC_USE_CTF | 
| PKGSRC_USE_FORTIFY | PKGSRC_USE_MKTOOLS | 
| PKGSRC_USE_RELRO | PKGSRC_USE_SSP | 
| PKGSRC_USE_STACK_CHECK | PKGTASKS_DATAFILE | 
| PKGTOOLS_ARGS | PKGTOOLS_ENV | 
| PKG_ALTERNATIVES | PKG_APACHE | 
| PKG_APACHE_ACCEPTED | PKG_APACHE_DEFAULT | 
| PKG_BEST_EXISTS | PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS | 
| PKG_COMPRESSION | PKG_CONFIG | 
| PKG_CONFIG_PERMS | PKG_CREATE_USERGROUP | 
| PKG_DBDIR | PKG_DB_TMPDIR | 
| PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL | PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS | 
| PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT | PKG_DEVELOPER | 
| PKG_DISABLED_OPTIONS | PKG_FATAL_ERRORS | 
| PKG_FC | PKG_FILELIST_CMD | 
| PKG_GECOS | PKG_GID | 
| PKG_GROUPS | PKG_GROUPS_VARS | 
| PKG_HOME | PKG_INIT_SCRIPTS | 
| PKG_JAVA_HOME | PKG_JVM | 
| PKG_JVMS_ACCEPTED | PKG_JVM_DEFAULT | 
| PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS | PKG_LIBTOOL | 
| PKG_MKSYMLINKS | PKG_OPTIONS | 
| PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS | PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS | 
| PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS | PKG_OPTIONS_NONEMPTY_SETS | 
| PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS | PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS | 
| PKG_OPTIONS_VAR | PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS | 
| PKG_REFCOUNT_DBDIR | PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS | 
| PKG_RESUME_TRANSFERS | PKG_SHELL | 
| PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS | PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS | 
| PKG_SYSCONFBASE | PKG_SYSCONFBASEDIR | 
| PKG_SYSCONFDIR | PKG_SYSCONFDIR_PERMS | 
| PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR | PKG_SYSCONFVAR | 
| PKG_TOOLS_BIN | PKG_UID | 
| PKG_UPDATE_FONTS_DB | PKG_USERS | 
| PKG_USERS_VARS | PKG_VERBOSE | 
| PLEASE | PLIST | 
| PLIST_AWK | PLIST_AWK_ENV | 
| PLIST_SRC | PLIST_SUBST | 
| PLIST_TYPE | PLIST_VARS | 
| POPTOP_USE_MPPE | POSSIBLE_GFORTRAN_VERSION | 
| POST_FETCH_HOOK | PREFER | 
| PREFER_NATIVE | PREFER_NATIVE_PTHREADS | 
| PREFER_PKGSRC | PREFIX | 
| PREPEND_PATH | PRE_ROOT_CMD | 
| PRIVILEGED_STAGES | PS | 
| PTHREAD_AUTO_VARS | PTHREAD_CFLAGS | 
| PTHREAD_LDFLAGS | PTHREAD_LIBS | 
| PTHREAD_OPTS | PTHREAD_TYPE | 
| PVM_SSH | PYPKGPREFIX | 
| PYSOABISUFFIX | PYTHON_27_ACCEPTED | 
| PYTHON_FOR_BUILD_ONLY | PYTHON_SELF_CONFLICT | 
| PYTHON_VERSION | PYTHON_VERSIONED_DEPENDENCIES | 
| PYTHON_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | PYTHON_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE | 
| PYTHON_VERSION_DEFAULT | PYTHON_VERSION_REQD | 
| PYVERSSUFFIX | QMAILDIR | 
| QMAIL_ALIAS_USER | QMAIL_DAEMON_USER | 
| QMAIL_LOG_USER | QMAIL_NOFILES_GROUP | 
| QMAIL_PASSWD_USER | QMAIL_QMAIL_GROUP | 
| QMAIL_QUEUE_DIR | QMAIL_QUEUE_EXTRA | 
| QMAIL_QUEUE_USER | QMAIL_REMOTE_USER | 
| QMAIL_ROOT_USER | QMAIL_SEND_USER | 
| QORE_LATEST_MODULE_API | QORE_MODULE_API | 
| QORE_MODULE_DIR | QORE_USER_MODULE_DIR | 
| QORE_VERSION | QPOPPER_FAC | 
| QPOPPER_SPOOL_DIR | QPOPPER_USER | 
| RAKE_NAME | RASMOL_DEPTH | 
| RCD_DIR | RCD_ORDER | 
| RCD_SCRIPTS | RCD_SCRIPTS_DIR | 
| RCD_SCRIPTS_EXAMPLEDIR | RCD_SCRIPTS_MODE | 
| RCD_SCRIPTS_SHELL | RCD_SCRIPT_SRC | 
| RCD_SUBR | RDOC | 
| READLINE_DEFAULT | READLINE_TYPE | 
| REAL_ROOT_GROUP | REAL_ROOT_USER | 
| RECURSIVE_MAKE | RELAY_CTRL_DIR | 
| RELRO_SUPPORTED | REPLACE_AWK | 
| REPLACE_BASH | REPLACE_CSH | 
| REPLACE_KSH | REPLACE_LUA | 
| REPLACE_NODEJS | REPLACE_OCTAVE | 
| REPLACE_PERL | REPLACE_PERL6 | 
| REPLACE_PHP | REPLACE_PYTHON | 
| REPLACE_QORE | REPLACE_R | 
| REPLACE_RUBY | REPLACE_RUBY_DIRS | 
| REPLACE_RUBY_PAT | REPLACE_SH | 
| REPLACE_TEXLUA | REPLACE_TOOL_PYTHON | 
| REPLACE_WISH | REQD_DIRS | 
| REQD_DIRS_PERMS | REQD_FILES | 
| REQD_FILES_MODE | REQD_FILES_PERMS | 
| RESOLV_AUTO_VARS | RESOLV_LDFLAGS | 
| RESOLV_LIBS | RM | 
| ROCKSPEC_NAME | ROCKSPEC_SPECFILE | 
| ROOT_CMD | ROOT_GROUP | 
| ROOT_USER | RPCGEN | 
| RPM | RPM2PKG_PLIST | 
| RPM2PKG_PREFIX | RPM2PKG_STAGE | 
| RPM2PKG_STRIP | RPM2PKG_SUBPREFIX | 
| RPMFILES | RPMIGNOREPATH | 
| RPM_DB_PREFIX | RSSH_CVS_PATH | 
| RSSH_RDIST_PATH | RSSH_RSYNC_PATH | 
| RSSH_SCP_PATH | RSSH_SFTP_SERVER_PATH | 
| RUBY | RUBYGEM | 
| RUBYGEM_MANPAGES | RUBYGEM_NAME | 
| RUBYGEM_OPTIONS | RUBYGEM_USE_MANPAGES | 
| RUBYGEM_VERBOSE | RUBY_ABI_VERSION | 
| RUBY_ARCH | RUBY_ARCHINC | 
| RUBY_ARCHLIB | RUBY_BASE | 
| RUBY_BASERIDIR | RUBY_BUILD_DOCUMENT | 
| RUBY_DLEXT | RUBY_DOC | 
| RUBY_DYNAMIC_DIRS | RUBY_EG | 
| RUBY_ENCODING_ARG | RUBY_EXTCONF | 
| RUBY_EXTCONF_CHECK | RUBY_EXTCONF_DEBUG | 
| RUBY_EXTCONF_MAKEFILE | RUBY_GEM_ARCH | 
| RUBY_GEM_BASE | RUBY_INC | 
| RUBY_LIB | RUBY_LIB_BASE | 
| RUBY_NAME | RUBY_NOVERSION | 
| RUBY_PKGPREFIX | RUBY_RAILS | 
| RUBY_RAILS61_VERSION | RUBY_RAILS70_VERSION | 
| RUBY_RAILS71_VERSION | RUBY_RAILS72_VERSION | 
| RUBY_RAILS80_VERSION | RUBY_RAILS_ACCEPTED | 
| RUBY_RAILS_DEFAULT | RUBY_RAILS_REQD | 
| RUBY_RAILS_STRICT_DEP | RUBY_RIDIR | 
| RUBY_SETUP | RUBY_SHLIB | 
| RUBY_SHLIBALIAS | RUBY_SHLIBVER | 
| RUBY_SIMPLE_INSTALL | RUBY_SITEARCHLIB | 
| RUBY_SITELIB | RUBY_SITELIB_BASE | 
| RUBY_SITERIDIR | RUBY_SLEXT | 
| RUBY_SRCDIR | RUBY_STATICLIB | 
| RUBY_SUFFIX | RUBY_SYSRIDIR | 
| RUBY_USE_PTHREAD | RUBY_VENDORARCHLIB | 
| RUBY_VENDORLIB | RUBY_VENDORLIB_BASE | 
| RUBY_VER | RUBY_VERSION | 
| RUBY_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED | RUBY_VERSIONS_INCOMPATIBLE | 
| RUBY_VERSION_DEFAULT | RUBY_VERSION_REQD | 
| RUBY_VER_DIR | RUN | 
| RUN_LDCONFIG | RUST_TYPE | 
| SCO | SCREWS_GROUP | 
| SCREWS_USER | SCRIPTS_ENV | 
| SCROLLKEEPER_DATADIR | SCROLLKEEPER_REBUILDDB | 
| SCROLLKEEPER_UPDATEDB | SDIST_PAWD | 
| SDL12_TYPE | SERIAL_DEVICES | 
| SETGIDGAME | SETGID_GAMES_PERMS | 
| SETUID_ROOT_PERMS | SH | 
| SHLIB_EXT | SHORTNAME | 
| SIGN_PACKAGES | SILC_CLIENT_WITH_PERL | 
| SITE_SPECIFIC_PKGS | SKIP_DEPENDS | 
| SMF_INSTANCES | SMF_MANIFEST | 
| SMF_METHODS | SMF_METHOD_SHELL | 
| SMF_METHOD_SRC | SMF_NAME | 
| SMF_PREFIX | SMF_SRCDIR | 
| SNIPROXY_GROUP | SNIPROXY_USER | 
| SOURCE_BUFFSIZE | SPECIAL_PERMS | 
| SPECIFIC_PKGS | SSH_SUID | 
| SSLCERTBUNDLE | SSLCERTS | 
| SSLDIR | SSLKEYS | 
| SSP_SUPPORTED | SSYNC_PAWD | 
| STEP_MSG | STRIP | 
| STRIP_DBG | STRIP_DEBUG | 
| STRIP_DEBUG_SUPPORTED | STRIP_FILES_SKIP | 
| SU | SUBDIR | 
| SUBST | SUBST_CLASSES | 
| SUBST_FILES | SUBST_FILTER_CMD | 
| SUBST_MESSAGE | SUBST_NOOP_OK | 
| SUBST_SED | SUBST_SHOW_DIFF | 
| SUBST_SKIP_TEXT_CHECK | SUBST_STAGE | 
| SUBST_VARS | SUNWSPROBASE | 
| SUSE_PREFER | SU_CMD | 
| SVN_EXTRACTDIR | SVN_REPO | 
| SVN_REPOSITORIES | SVN_REVISION | 
| SYSCONFBASE | TARGET_MACHINE_ARCH | 
| TBL | TERMCAP_TYPE | 
| TERMINFO_DEFAULT | TERMINFO_TYPE | 
| TEST | TEST_DEPENDS | 
| TEST_DIRS | TEST_ENV | 
| TEST_ENV_SHELL | TEST_MAKE_CMD | 
| TEST_MAKE_FLAGS | TEST_TARGET | 
| TEXLIVE_IGNORE_PATTERNS | TEXLIVE_REV | 
| TEXLIVE_UNVERSIONED | TEXMFSITE | 
| TEX_FORMATS | TEX_HYPHEN_DAT | 
| TEX_HYPHEN_DEF | TEX_TEXMF_DIRS | 
| THTTPD_LOG_FACILITY | TINYDYN_USER | 
| TLS | TLSWRAPPER_CHROOT | 
| TO | TOOLDIR | 
| TOOLS_ALIASES | TOOLS_ALWAYS_WRAP | 
| TOOLS_ARGS | TOOLS_BROKEN | 
| TOOLS_CMD | TOOLS_CMDLINE_SED | 
| TOOLS_CREATE | TOOLS_CROSS_DESTDIR | 
| TOOLS_DIR | TOOLS_FAIL | 
| TOOLS_GNU_MISSING | TOOLS_LDCONFIG | 
| TOOLS_NOOP | TOOLS_PATH | 
| TOOLS_SCRIPT | TOOLS_USE_CROSS_COMPILE | 
| TOOL_DEPENDS | TTF_FONTDIR | 
| TTF_FONTS_DIR | TYPE | 
| UAC_REQD_EXECS | UCSPI_SSL_GROUP | 
| UCSPI_SSL_USER | UNBOUND_GROUP | 
| UNBOUND_LOG_FACILITY | UNBOUND_USER | 
| UNLIMIT_RESOURCES | UNPRIVILEGED | 
| UNPRIVILEGED_GROUP | UNPRIVILEGED_GROUPS | 
| UNPRIVILEGED_USER | UNWRAP_FILES | 
| UNWRAP_PATTERNS | UPDATE_GEMSPEC | 
| UPDATE_TARGET | URI | 
| USERGROUP_PHASE | USERPPP_GROUP | 
| USER_SPECIFIC_PKGS | USE_ABI_DEPENDS | 
| USE_ADA_FEATURES | USE_APR | 
| USE_BSD_MAKEFILE | USE_BUILTIN | 
| USE_CC_FEATURES | USE_CROSS_COMPILE | 
| USE_CURSES | USE_CWRAPPERS | 
| USE_CXX_FEATURES | USE_DB185 | 
| USE_FEATURES | USE_GAMESGROUP | 
| USE_GCC_RUNTIME | USE_IMAKE | 
| USE_INDIRECT_DEPENDS | USE_JAVA | 
| USE_JAVA2 | USE_LANGUAGES | 
| USE_LIBTOOL | USE_NATIVE_GCC | 
| USE_NETBSD_REPO | USE_PKGSRC_GCC | 
| USE_PKGSRC_GCC_RUNTIME | USE_PKGTASKS | 
| USE_PKG_ADMIN_DIGEST | USE_RUBY_EXTCONF | 
| USE_RUBY_INSTALL | USE_RUBY_SETUP | 
| USE_RUBY_SETUP_PKG | USE_TMPFILES | 
| USE_TOOLS | UUCP_GROUP | 
| UUCP_USER | VARBASE | 
| VARNAME | VIM_EXTRA_OPTS | 
| WARNING_MSG | WCALC_CGIDIR | 
| WCALC_CGIPATH | WCALC_HTMLDIR | 
| WCALC_HTMLPATH | WDM_MANAGERS | 
| WRAPPER_CC | WRAPPER_REORDER_CMDS | 
| WRKDIR | WRKDIR_BASENAME | 
| WRKDIR_LOCKTYPE | WRKLOG | 
| WRKOBJDIR | WRKSRC | 
| X10_PORT | X11 | 
| X11BASE | X11_PKGSRCDIR | 
| X11_TYPE | X509_CERTIFICATE | 
| X509_KEY | XAW_TYPE | 
| XLOCK_DEFAULT_MODE | XMKMF | 
| XMKMF_FLAGS | XXX | 
| XXXX | YES | 
| ZSH_STATIC | __stdc__ | 
| _vargroups | accept | 
| acquire-localbase-lock | acquire-lock | 
| add | added | 
| administrator | alloca | 
| alternatives | aslr | 
| asprintf | atlas | 
| autoconf | automake | 
| autoreconf | awk | 
| barrier | bash | 
| big-endian | bin-install | 
| bind | binpkg-list | 
| blas | bootstrap-depends | 
| broken | broken_on_platform | 
| bsd | bsd.prog.mk | 
| build | build-env | 
| buildlink-directories | buildlink-oss-soundcard-h | 
| built-in | builtin | 
| c | c++ | 
| ccache | cce | 
| cdefs | ceil | 
| changes | changes-entry | 
| changes-entry-noupdate | check | 
| check-clean | check-files | 
| check-files-clean | check-hackage | 
| check-vulnerable | checksum | 
| checksum-phase | clean | 
| clean-depends | cleandir | 
| commit | commit-changes-entry | 
| compact | compiler | 
| conf | config.guess | 
| config.sub | configuration | 
| configure | configure-env | 
| configure-help | configure_args | 
| connect | cos | 
| cpe | cputime | 
| create-usergroup | csh | 
| ctf | cvs | 
| debug | debug-barrier | 
| declaration | declare | 
| defined | depend | 
| dependencies | depends | 
| depends-checksum | depends-fetch | 
| deps | describe | 
| destdir | disable | 
| distclean | distfiles | 
| distinfo | dl | 
| dlopen | do-buildlink | 
| do-clean | do-configure | 
| do-configure-post-hook | do-extract | 
| do-fetch | do-install | 
| download | emul | 
| emul-distinfo | emul-fetch | 
| emulation | emulator | 
| enable | endian | 
| endif | enomem | 
| ensurepip | err | 
| errx | etc | 
| exp | extract-rpm | 
| fabs | feature | 
| features | fetch | 
| fetch-list | follows | 
| forbids | form | 
| format | fortify | 
| fortify_source | fossil | 
| friend | fts | 
| fts_close | fts_open | 
| fts_read | fts_set | 
| gcc | gethostbyaddr | 
| gethostbyname | gethostbyname2 | 
| getopt_long | getprogname | 
| getservbyname | getservbyport | 
| getservent | gettext | 
| git | github | 
| gitlab | glob | 
| gnu | gnu_configure_strict | 
| go | go-deps | 
| golang | guess-license | 
| hashbang | heimdal | 
| help | hg | 
| imake | in-tree | 
| increment | indirect | 
| inet_aton | install | 
| install-env | interp | 
| interpreter | intl | 
| ip4 | ip6 | 
| ipv4 | ipv6 | 
| iso | kerberos | 
| krb | krb5 | 
| ksh | lapack | 
| latex | libiconv | 
| libintl_bindtextdomain | libintl_gettext | 
| libintl_textdomain | libnbcompat | 
| libs | libtool | 
| licence | license | 
| lintl | little-endian | 
| lock | locking | 
| lua | lvalue | 
| machine_endian | make | 
| makedistinfo | makepatchsum | 
| makesum | mdi | 
| memory | mercurial | 
| meta | meta-package | 
| meta_package | mit-krb5 | 
| mk.conf | mkl | 
| mount | move | 
| moved | mprotect | 
| mps | mremap | 
| native | nb | 
| nbcompat | netlib | 
| network | node | 
| node.js | nodejs | 
| obstack | obstack_ptr_grow | 
| occurs | only | 
| openblas | options | 
| options.mk | order | 
| override | override-intltool | 
| override-message-intltool | package | 
| parallel | path | 
| pax | paxctl | 
| pbulk-index | pc | 
| perl | perl5 | 
| perms | php | 
| pkg-build-options | pkg-config | 
| pkg_build_options | pkgsrc | 
| platform | plist | 
| post-extract | post-fetch | 
| post-wrapper | pre-build-checks-hook | 
| pre-configure-checks-hook | pre-extract | 
| pre-fetch | print-go-deps | 
| print-plist | print-summary-data | 
| privileged-install-hook | pypi | 
| python | r | 
| readme-all | recursive | 
| recv | recvfrom | 
| regcomp | release-localbase-lock | 
| release-lock | relro | 
| remove | removed | 
| rename | renamed | 
| reorder | replace | 
| replace_interpreter | reproducible | 
| resolv | root | 
| ruby | send | 
| sendfile | sendto | 
| setenv | setgid | 
| setprogname | setuid | 
| sh | shebang | 
| show | show-all | 
| show-build-defs | show-depends | 
| show-depends-dirs | show-depends-pkgpaths | 
| show-depends-recursive | show-deps | 
| show-distfiles | show-downlevel | 
| show-subdir-var | show-tools | 
| show-var | show-vars | 
| snprintf | socket | 
| ssp | st_mode | 
| stage-install | strcasestr | 
| strict | strip | 
| strndup | strnlen | 
| strsep | subst | 
| substitutions | subversion | 
| sun | sunpro | 
| sunwspro | svn | 
| symlink | test | 
| test-env | tex | 
| texlive | tmp | 
| todo | tool | 
| tools | tools-libtool-m4-override | 
| transitive | type | 
| ulimit | undefined | 
| undo-replace | unlimit | 
| unprivileged | unprivileged-install-hook | 
| unstripped | update | 
| updated | upload | 
| upload-distfiles | use_tools | 
| user | utimes | 
| vasprintf | verbose | 
| vsnprintf | warn | 
| warning | warnings | 
| warnx | wattr_off | 
| wattr_on | work | 
| wrapper | wrkdir | 
Table of Contents
This section contains information on editing the pkgsrc guide itself.
The pkgsrc guide's source code is stored in
	pkgsrc/doc/guide/files, and several files
	are created from it:
pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt
pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.html
https://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.pdf: The PDF version of the pkgsrc guide.
https://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.ps: PostScript version of the pkgsrc guide.
The procedure to edit the pkgsrc guide is:
Make sure you have checked out the htdocs repository into a sibling directory of your pkgsrc directory. You will need the ability to commit from both pkgsrc and htdocs.
Make sure you have the packages needed to
	regenerate the pkgsrc guide (and other XML-based NetBSD
	documentation) installed. These are automatically installed when
	you install the meta-pkgs/pkgsrc-guide-tools package.
Run cd doc/guide to get to the right directory. All further steps will take place here.
Edit the XML file(s) in
	files/.
Run bmake to check the pkgsrc
	guide for valid XML and to build the final output files. If you
	get any errors at this stage, you can just edit the files, as
	there are only symbolic links in the working directory, pointing
	to the files in files/.
(cd files && cvs commit)
Run bmake clean && bmake to regenerate the output files with the proper RCS Ids.
Run bmake regen to install and
	commit the files in both pkgsrc/doc and
	htdocs.
If you have added, removed or renamed some chapters, you need to synchronize them using cvs add or cvs delete in the htdocs directory.